夜雨聆风学习资料网 资料列表 开通 VIP 用登录 / 注册 ⌄
PDF

最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本

查看资料信息、公开预览和下载状态。

共 195 页PDF · 145.5MB
下载

文档在线预览

公开展示前 10 页
100%
1
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第1页预览
2
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第2页预览
3
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第3页预览
4
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第4页预览
5
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第5页预览
6
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第6页预览
7
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第7页预览
8
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第8页预览
9
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第9页预览
10
《最新冀教版9年级英语课本•全一册_26秋新教材初中课本合集,各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_冀教版•初中英语电子课本》第10页预览

本文档共 195 页 剩余 185 页未展示,请下载后查阅

下载

文档文本内容

It’s fun!
It’s easy!
九年级
English
义务教育教科书
英语( 衔接三年级起点)
English
义务教育教科书
英语( 衔接三年级起点)
九年级
主  编    田贵森    Jim Parsons
副 主 编  杨永军    Barbara Spilchuk    张晓玲
编  者  朱勇弟    王凌凌    张敬彩    李宇梅    杨 琳    魏勇军
            刘东明    付建美    Yangsheng Guo    Leonard Judge    Anja Pujic
责任编辑  杨慧敏    焦维棉    李 蘅    王骥腾
特约编辑    Naama B.David    雷天生
美术编辑    张尧杰
责任校对    任彦彦
责任印制    崔  丽
书    名    英语(衔接三年级起点)  九年级
出  版   
http://www.hbep.com
       ( 石家庄市联盟路705 号,050061)
发  行    河北省新华书店
印  刷    河北新视野彩印有限公司
开  本    787×1092 1/16
印  张    12
字    数    320 千字
版  次    2014 年5 月第1 版 
印  次    2024 年7 月第11 次印刷 
印  数   2,287,231-2,616,130
书  号   ISBN 978-7-5434-9839-6
定  价   11.30 元
冀发改价调 [2022]1365 号
冀发改价审 [2024]102072
本书著作权由河北教育出版社独占使用
版权所有·请勿擅用本书制作各类出版物·违者必究
如有印刷质量问题,请与本社出版部联系调换,电话:18603114066
如对教材内容有意见或建议,请发送邮箱:learningenglish@hbep.com
购书电话:0311-88643600
图书在版编目(CIP)数据
    英语. 九年级 / 田贵森著. -- 石家庄 : 河北教育
出版社, 2014.5(2024.7 重印)
    义务教育教科书. 衔接三年级起点
    ISBN 978-7-5434-9839-6
    Ⅰ. ①英… Ⅱ. ①田… Ⅲ. ①英语课-初中-教材
Ⅳ. ①G634.411
    中国版本图书馆CIP 数据核字(2014) 第085739 号
致 同 学
亲爱的同学们,转眼就是义务教育阶段最后一学年了,欢迎大家继续使
用这套《英语》教材!
本册《英语》教材供九年级使用。
九年级教材不再分上册和下册,而是合为了一本,供同学们全学年使
用。全书共十个单元,后面两个单元不再安排新的语法项目,对新词汇的数
量也进行了控制,以便同学们能更有效地复习。
本学年我们将徜徉在文学的殿堂,体验和欣赏一些诗歌、寓言、电影与
戏剧等文学作品。我们还将学习关于安全和救护的生活常识,探讨健康的生
活方式。你们知道如何在生活中运用沟通技巧、得体地进行社会交往吗?这
也许是渐渐长大的你们将不断面临的困惑和问题,本册内容将给予你们更多
的思索和启迪。另外,语言与文化密不可分,学习语言就要学习语言所依存
的文化。因此,在交流中要时刻保持文化意识。我们将专门介绍一些世界各
地的文化特点,帮助同学们开阔视野,了解更多东西方文化的异同。
在初中阶段的最后一段时光中,我们要更多地参与、交流,并经常反思
和总结。相信自己,只要不断付出就会有所收获。祝大家学习之旅愉快!
Units
Functions
Grammar
Unit 1 (P1~16)
Stay Healthy
Seeing a Doctor
Talking about Health
Modal Verbs: should, need
Unit 2 (P17~32)
Great People
Talking about Great People 
and Their Lives
Adverbial Clause with “before”, 
“after”, “as”
Attributive Clause with “who”, 
“that”
Unit 3 (P33~48)
Safety
Reminding and Warning
Imperatives
Unit 4 (P49~64)
Stories and Poems
Enjoying Literature
Past Continuous Tense
Modal Verb: must
Unit 5 (P65~80)
Look into Science
Talking about Science
Attributive Clause
Unit 6 (P81~96)
Movies and Theatre
Talking about Entertainment
Object Complements
Passive Voice
Unit 7 (P97~112)
Work for Peace
Talking about Disputes and 
Settlements
Conjunctions: and, but, or, so
Unit 8 (P113~128)
Culture Shapes Us
Talking about Cultural 
Differences
Adverbial Clause with “though” 
or “although”
Unit 9 (P129~144)
Communication
Talking about Interpersonal 
Communication
Unit 10 (P145~160)
Get Ready for the 
Future
Talking about the Future and 
Giving Wishes
Vocabulary (P161~176)
Structures and Expressions (P177~181)
Irregular Verbs (P182~183)
Grammar (P184~188)
Contents
­1
Lessons 1 ~ 6
Stay Healthy
Functions
 Seeing a Doctor
 Talking about Health
Grammar
 Modal Verbs: should, need
Structures
 I don’t feel well.
 Need we go there right now?
 I’ve got a pain here.
 What should we do?
UNIT
1
We Will Learn
­2
Lesson 1: What’s Wrong, Danny?
• When you don’t feel well, what do you usually do?
• What is the worst illness you’ve ever had?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
It’s 3:00 a.m. Danny wakes up his 
parents.
Mrs. Dinosaur: What’s wrong, 
Danny?
Danny: I don’t feel well. My stomach 
hurts.
Mrs. Dinosaur: You ate ten donuts 
for dessert! That’s the problem. 
Danny: (He starts to cry.) I regret 
eating so many donuts now. My 
stomach has never hurt this much 
before. 
Mr. Dinosaur: (He sits up and feels 
Danny’s head.) You’ve got a high 
fever, son. You look pale. You are 
sick, aren’t you? We should go to 
the hospital.
Danny: Need we go there right now?
Mr. Dinosaur: Yes, we must.
Mrs. Dinosaur: Don’t cry, dear. 
You’ll be all right. 
Danny’s father gets dressed quickly. 
He and Danny get into the car, and they 
drive to the hospital. Soon they arrive. 
Nurse Sara: Hi Danny. I’m Nurse Sara. 
Don’t worry. The doctor will see you 
soon. 
She takes them to a small examination 
room. Soon, a doctor arrives.
Dr. Ling: Hi! I’m Dr. Ling. How are 
you feeling, Danny?
Danny: (He points to the right side of 
his stomach.) I’ve got a pain here. 
The doctor feels Danny’s stomach. 
Danny starts to cry again.
Dr. Ling: Pardon me, Danny. I know it 
hurts. 
Mr. Dinosaur: He also has a fever. 
Dr. Ling: Danny needs to stay in the 
hospital tonight. We may need to take 
an X-ray.
Mr. Dinosaur: (He takes Danny’s hand.) 
It’s going to be OK, son. I’ll stay with 
you.
­3
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
1. Why does Danny wake up his parents early in the morning?
2. What does Danny regret doing?
3. How do they get to the hospital?
4. What does Dr. Ling ask Danny to do?
Listen to the dialogue and tick the correct answers.
2
1. What’s wrong with the woman?
    
 She has a high fever.	 	
	
 She has a cold.
2. Did the medicine help her get well?
    
 Yes, it did.	
	
	
	
 No, it didn’t.
3. What advice did the man give to the woman?
    
 She should go to see the doctor.	
 She should try other medicine.
The words in italics are from this lesson. Tick the correct words to 
complete the sentences.
3
1. The boy looks so pale that there is no ________ in his face.
    
 colour	 	
	
	
	
 fear
2. We’d better take an X-ray. With a ________ picture, the doctor will easily see 
the problem. 
    
 clear	
	
	
	
	
 colourful   
3. I did a ________ thing. I really regret it.
    
 great	
	
	
	
	
 stupid
4. Jane had a pain in her leg. She ________ walk for a week.
    
 could	
	
	
	
	
 couldn’t
Work in pairs. Make up a dialogue. One person can be the doctor, 
and the other can be the patient. You can use the following 
expressions.
4
The doctor may ask:
How are you feeling?
What’s the matter?
What’s wrong?
You may tell the 
doctor:
I’ve got a pain here.
I have a fever.
I have a stomachache.
The doctor may say:
Don’t worry.
It’s going to be OK.
You need to stay in the 
hospital.
We need to take an X-ray.
­4
Lesson 2: A Visit to the Dentist
• Have you ever had a toothache?
• How do you take care of your teeth?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Diary,
I’m really afraid of going to the dentist. I don’t know why, but I have had 
this fear since I was very young. When my mum wants me to go to the 
dentist, I always refuse. 
This morning, I woke up with a terrible toothache. I told my mum about it. 
She thought that one of my teeth was probably rotten and that I needed to go 
to a dentist. I had no choice but to go with her. 
When we got to the dentist’s office, there were strange smells, strange 
sounds and people dressed in strange clothing. Imagine how scared I was! 
My hands were shaking. My legs felt so heavy, and it was difficult to stand! 
Fortunately, the dentist, Dr. Hu, was very kind. She saw right away that I 
was scared and told me not to worry. She helped me get up on the chair. “You 
needn’t be afraid. What kind of music do you like?” she asked. She gave me 
a headset, and I listened to music while she worked. 
Before I knew it, my aching tooth was fixed. My tooth did not hurt at all. Dr. 
Hu smiled at me and said, “See? I told you it would be OK.” 
On the way home, Mum told me an old German saying: 
Fear makes the wolf bigger than he is. 
Learning Tip
The word doctor is a general term. It can be used to address doctors such 
as dentists, surgeons, physicians and some professors.
­5
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. Wang Mei was scared to see the dentist.	
	
	
	
     (      )
2. Wang Mei showed great interest in everything at the dentist’s office.   (      )
3. Dr. Hu asked Wang Mei to watch TV while she worked.	
	
     (      )
4. Dr. Hu was kind and good at fixing teeth.	
	
	
	
     (      )
5. Wang Mei’s mum told her an old Russian story on the way home.	     (      )
Match each paragraph with its main idea. Then retell the story.
2
Find the words in this lesson that have the same meaning as the 
circled words.
3
1. Jack invited her to the tea party, but she said no to his invitation.
2. She’s had a pain in her tooth all day.
3. I was late, but luckily the train was late, too.
4. The students complete the activities on their computers and wear their 
    headphones to talk to their teacher.
5. These bananas will go bad in a week.
Work in pairs and talk about your experiences at a doctor’s office.
4
Task tips:
• Do you still remember one of your visits to a doctor?
• Are you afraid of going to see a doctor?
• How do you overcome fear when you face a difficult situation?
Paragraph 1	 	
	
Wang Mei was nervous at the dentist’s office.
Paragraph 2	 	
	
Dr. Hu let Wang Mei listen to music to relax.
Paragraph 3	 	
	
Wang Mei is really afraid of going to the dentist.
Paragraph 4	 	
	
Wang Mei’s mum told her a saying.
Paragraph 5	 	
	
Wang Mei had a terrible toothache this morning.
Paragraph 6	 	
	
Dr. Hu fixed Wang Mei’s tooth quickly.
­6
Lesson 3: Good Food, Good Health
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
• What foods do you often eat every day?
• In your opinion, what’s a healthy and balanced diet?
Here are the four food groups:
• Grains
Bread, noodles and rice are all grain foods. Breakfast cereal 
is also made of different grains. Grains give you vitamins, minerals and fibre. Did 
you know corn is the best food for Vitamin B1?
Hands-on Activity
Would you like to try a fruit salad? Here’s how to make one: 
First, cut some fruit into pieces and put them in a large bowl. Any fresh fruit 
that’s in season is a good choice. Then, put a spoonful of honey and a cup of 
yogurt on top. You can add some lemon juice if you like. At last, chill the fruit 
salad in the refrigerator for at least 10 minutes. It will taste better. 
• Fruits and vegetables
Fruits and vegetables are also rich in vitamins, minerals and 
fibre. They help you grow and stay healthy. 
Salads are very popular in Western countries. They’re made 
with lots of fresh vegetables.
• Protein foods
Many people think that only meat and chicken are protein 
foods. Actually, other foods like fish, eggs and beans have a 
lot of protein, too. In China and other East Asian countries, 
people often eat tofu and other bean products. They also 
drink soy milk. These are all good protein foods. 
• Calcium foods
Your body needs calcium to stay healthy. Calcium makes your bones and teeth 
strong. Milk, cheese and yogurt contain calcium. But did you know that many 
green vegetables also have a lot of calcium?
Have a balanced diet!
A well-balanced diet includes foods from each food group. Do we need to balance 
our diet? Of course, we do. A balanced diet will keep you healthy and give you lots 
of energy!
­7
Let’s Do It!
Grains
Fruits and vegetables
Protein foods
Calcium foods
Breakfast
Lunch
 Supper
Choose the food words from the lesson and put them in the correct 
food group.
1
Match each word with its definition. Then complete the passage 
using the four words.
2
It’s important for us to keep a balanced ________. To do this, we must 
eat many different kinds of foods. Bread, noodles, ________ and rice are 
all grains. Grain foods give us vitamins, minerals and fibre. Fish, meat and 
________ are full of protein. Calcium, which can be found in cheese, milk 
and ________, is good for our bones and teeth.
corn
yogurt
beans
diet
  a thick, white and creamy dairy food
  a tall plant with yellow seeds that can be eaten
  the food that you eat and drink regularly
  a good source of protein
What do you usually eat at every meal? Do a survey and compare 
your eating habits with those of your classmates.
3
grains
calcium foods
protein foods 
fruits and 
vegetables 
­8
Lesson 4: Don’t Smoke, Please!
• Do you know when World No Tobacco Day is?
• Do people in your family smoke? If so, what do you advise them
   to do?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Smoking is a bad habit. As a student, you should 
never smoke. 
Why is smoking harmful?
• Smoking is bad for your health. It can cause diseases of the heart and lungs. 
Every year, millions of people around the world die as a result of smoking. 
That’s terrible!
• If you smoke, you harm yourself, and you’re also harming the people 
around you with your second-hand smoke. 
• Smoking pollutes the environment, too. Everyone wants to live in a clean 
environment and breathe fresh air. In many countries, smoking in public places 
is now against the law.
What should we do?
• Never touch cigarettes. Whenever someone offers you a cigarette, you 
should always say no. Don’t take that risk.
• When somebody talks about smoking, change the topic.
• If your family members smoke, encourage 
them to stop smoking. It will be hard for them, 
but you should try explaining how important it 
is for their health.
• Eat more fruits and vegetables, do more 
exercise, and form good habits.
Once you get into the habit of smoking, it’s not 
easy to give it up. Stay away from cigarettes and 
you can live a long, healthy and happy life.
­9
Fill in the chart with the information from the lesson.
1
Let’s Do It!
Read the following sentences and pay attention to the modal verb 
should. Then give advice for each problem using should.
2
• We should go to the hospital right now.
• As a student, you should never smoke. 
1. I have a very bad toothache!
    You should go to see a dentist.
2. My new bicycle was stolen.
    _____________________________________________________________.
3. My bedroom is a mess.
    _____________________________________________________________.
4. My computer is broken. I can’t work without it.
    _____________________________________________________________.
5. I was late for school this morning, and my teacher was angry with me.
    _____________________________________________________________.
Harmful effects of smoking
Advice to stay away from cigarettes
• Smoking is bad for your ________. 
It can cause ________ of the heart 
and lungs. 
• Smoking ________ the environment. 
• Second-hand smoke is ________ to 
people who don’t smoke.
• Never ________ cigarettes.
• When somebody talks about 
smoking, change the ________. 
• ________ your family members to 
stop smoking.
• Eat more fruits and ________. Do 
more ________. Form good ________.
POSTERS AGAINST SMOKING
Many people smoke. Smoking is a bad habit! It causes cancer and 
heart disease. In 1988, the World Health Organization (WHO) decided 
to celebrate World No Tobacco Day (WNTD) on May 31 of each year to 
draw global attention to the negative effects of tobacco.
Let’s help people stay healthy! In a small group, make a poster that 
shows why smoking is bad.
Present your posters to the class. Put them up on the bulletin board 
in your school!
PROJECT
­10
• When you have a problem, what do you do first?
• Can disabled people live a happy life? Why or why not?
Lesson 5: Jane’s Lucky Life 
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
When Jane was ten years old, she became ill with a 
terrible disease. This disease damaged Jane’s body. She 
couldn’t move her arms or legs.
Jane is forty years old now. She is unable to do many 
things. She can’t brush her teeth. She can’t put on her 
shoes. She can’t run or jump. She can’t make breakfast.
But she dares to try many things. She has a wheelchair. 
She controls her wheelchair with her mouth. She writes 
letters without her hands. How does she do it? She talks to 
a special computer. She has a special telephone that is hers 
alone. She can answer it just by saying “hello”.
Jane is married and has two children. She likes to watch her eleven-year-old son 
play soccer. From her wheelchair, Jane cheers as her son runs and kicks the ball. 
Her daughter likes to play the piano. Jane will never play the piano, but she knows 
a lot about music. She enjoys encouraging her daughter.
Jane speaks to people about the things she has learned as a disabled person. 
“Everyone faces problems. If you only focus on your problems, you’ll have a 
life full of them. I don’t need any pity. I think about all the good things in my life. 
I have a life full of good things.
“Do you know who is really disabled? People who don’t know how lucky they are.”
Disabled people can do 
many things. 
Could you open the 
door for me, please?
Sure!
The sign says 
“Pull”, Danny, 
not “Push”.
No problem. 
Thank you!
Oh! Thanks!
Oh no! I can’t 
open it!
1
2
3
4
­11
Let’s Do It!
1 Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
1. What happened to Jane when she was ten years old?
2. How does Jane move around?
3. What special thing does Jane have?
4. Who does Jane think is really disabled?
1 Complete the sentences with the clues given and do the crossword.
2
1 Make sentences using the given information.
3
Example A: millions of people die/smoking
→ Millions of people die as a result of smoking.
1. thousands of people lost their homes/the fire
    → _______________________________________________________
2. he lost his job/his big mistake
    → _______________________________________________________
Example B: my life/good things
→ My life is full of good things.
1. his room/history books
    → _______________________________________________________
2. Danny’s mind/funny ideas
    → _______________________________________________________
1 Work in pairs. Which of these things do you think is the most 
important: money, family, a good job, health, good looks or 
friends? Why? Talk about your choices.
4
You can use this expression:
I think that… is the most important because…
1. The traffic lights are ________ by a central computer.
2. The ________ rang, and Peter answered it.
1
2
3
5
6
4
3. These are not her gloves. ________ 
are on the table.
4. Let’s go to see the basketball game 
and ________ for our team.
5. The boy is ________ a ball in the yard.
6. What a ________ it is that you missed 
the concert!
­12
• Have you ever visited someone in the hospital?
• What do you want to do when you are sick?
Lesson 6: Stay Away from the Hospital
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Li Ming,
I had a very interesting week! I had appendicitis. I don’t have it anymore, but I 
don’t have an appendix, either! The doctor took it out!
I slept all day after my appendix was taken out. The next day, when I woke up, 
I felt terrible and very sleepy. I didn’t want to eat, but I was very thirsty. My 
doctor said I had a fever. She told me to drink plenty of water and have a good 
rest. So I stayed in bed and rested. Sometimes the nurses gave me pop to drink!
Now I’m feeling much better. My mother brought me some new books to read 
(but no homework). I also have a television in my room!
I will write to you again soon.
Your friend,
Danny
Hi Danny,
I’m sorry to hear that you were sick this week. Now that you mention it, Wang 
Mei also had a bad day. One of her teeth was rotten, so she had to go to the 
dentist.
Fortunately, you and Wang Mei are both getting much better 
now. I think we should try hard to form good habits so that we 
can stay healthy and stay away from the hospital!
Yours,
Li Ming
­13
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Why did Danny stay in the hospital?
2. What advice did the doctor give to Danny?
3. Is Wang Mei getting much better now?
4. What’s Li Ming’s advice for staying healthy?
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box.
2
1. The boy’s mother is very ill. He ____________ get a job and earn money.
2.	____________ people take the subway every day.  
3.	With plenty of water and oil, our country ____________ natural resources. 
4.	____________ you have seen how it works, why not try it yourself?
millions of      now that      have no choice but to      be rich in
Complete the passage with the sentences in the box.
3
What is a heart attack? Your heart is a muscle. It 
moves blood around your body. To do its job, your 
heart muscle needs blood, too. ____________ Then 
you have a heart attack. 
To keep your heart well, you need to take care of 
your heart. ____________ They are good for your 
heart. Eggs, meat, cheese, butter and ice cream have 
a lot of fat, which is bad for your heart. Don’t eat too 
much of these foods. Also, exercise every day. Do not 
smoke. ____________
A. Eat lots of fruits, vegetables, grains and fish.
B. Smoking is very bad for your heart and your lungs.
C. If it doesn’t get blood, it can’t work.
­14
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Grammar in Use
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
sleepy   whenever   pale   mention    include    X-ray   regret   telephone   risk   cheer
1. If we don’t act now, we’ll ________ it in the future.
2. We all ________ as the team came onto the field.
3. Lily ________ in her letter that she might be moving abroad.
4. If you take a ________, you’re doing something that you know might be 
dangerous. 
5. You can ask for help ________ you need it.
6. The ________ showed that her leg was not broken.
7. He looks ________ from his long illness.
8. She picked up the ________ and dialed a number.
9. He was so ________ that he could hardly keep his eyes open.
10. The test ________ three parts: listening, speaking and writing.
II. Complete the passage with the words in the box. 
Drinking too much alcohol is a bad habit. It is ________ to 
one’s health. It can cause diseases of the liver and ________. Every year, many 
people die of alcohol poisoning. People who always drink ________ have a bad 
temper. It is also very ________ to drive after drinking. Drinking and driving can 
cause serious accidents. Teenagers, in particular, should ________ to drink as 
their bodies are growing. 
I. Need can be used as a modal verb as well as an ordinary verb. Read the  
following sentences and circle need where it is used as a modal verb. 
• Danny needs to stay in the hospital tonight. We may need to take an X-ray.
• She thought that I needed to go to a dentist.
• You needn’t be afraid.
• Need we balance our diet and eat foods from each food group?
may      harmful      dangerous      refuse      stomach      
­15
Listening and Speaking
Putting It All Together
This is Emily. What’s wrong with her? Use the chart to find out.
I. Listen to the dialogue and answer the questions.
1. What’s the relationship between the man and the woman?
2. Where does the conversation take place?
3. What’s the matter with the man?
4. Who will come to help them?
II. Complete the following dialogue.
(Bob is at the doctor’s office.)
Bob: Good morning, Doctor.
Doctor: Good morning. ____________________
Bob: ____________________
Doctor: Have you taken your temperature?
Bob: No, I haven’t.
Doctor: Let me see. Well, you have caught a bad cold. Take some medicine, and 
you’ll be all right in a few days.
Bob: ____________________
Doctor: Three times a day, after each meal. 
Bob: I’ll do as you say. Thank you. Goodbye!
Doctor: Bye!
Yesterday my dad felt sick. Today I feel sick. My stomach 
doesn’t feel well. Does my stomach hurt? No, there’s no 
pain. But I don’t want to eat, and I have a headache and a 
fever. What do you think I’ve got?
• A: Need we go there right now?
B: Yes, we must./No, we needn’t./No, we don’t have to.
II. Complete the passage with should or need.
Some teenagers are overweight. That means they are eating too much of the 
wrong foods. If you want to keep fit, you ________ have a balanced diet. Things 
like cake and cookies are high in calories and fat, but you ________ not stop 
eating them completely. Just make sure you don’t eat too much of them. You 
________ avoid drinking too much soda and juice. 
­16
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
I. Seeing a Doctor
I’ve got a pain here.                                      
                                                                     
I can talk about seeing a doctor in 
English.
II. Talking about Health
They help you grow and stay healthy.    
                                                             
I can talk about health in English.
III. Modal Verbs: should, need
As a student, you should never                         
smoke.                                                                               
                                                                                      
I can use “should” and “need” properly.
Has anyone in your family 
been sick?
No
No
Yes
No
Do you have a fever?
Yes or No (sometimes) Yes or No (usually)
Yes
No
Do you have a headache?
Yes or No (sometimes)
No
Yes or No 
(usually)
No
Do you have any other pain?
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Where is the pain?
In the abdomen.
On the right side 
of the abdomen.
--
In the stomach.
After a few hours, does the 
pain get better?
Yes or No (usually)
No. It always gets 
worse.
--
Yes
Do you want to eat?
No
No
No
No
What do you have?
You might have
food poisoning.
You might have
appendicitis.
You might have 
the stomach flu.
You might have 
a stomachache.
Move your feet!
Move your feet!
Move your whole body.
Move your feet!
The more you move your feet,
The more healthy you will be.
Move your feet!
Move Your Whole Body
Move your arms!
Move your arms!
Move your whole body.
Move your arms!
The more you move your arms,
The more healthy you will be.
Move your arms!
­17
Lessons 7 ~ 12
Great People
Functions
 Talking about Great People and Their Lives
Grammar
 Adverbial Clause with “before”, “after”, “as”
 Attributive Clause with “who”, “that”
Structures
 Einstein is most famous for his Theory of Relativity.
 He signed his last letter before he passed away.
 She had a high fever that made her blind and deaf.
 As Helen grew older, she made a lot of progress
  and learned to read.
UNIT
2
We Will Learn
­18
Lesson 7: What Is the Meaning of Life?
• Do you know any successful people? What does success mean 
   to you?
• What are your dreams for the future?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
After the history class, Li Ming sits in the classroom, deep in thought. Wang 
Mei comes in and the two start a dialogue. 
Wang Mei: Hi Li Ming. What are you thinking about? 
Li Ming: Oh, hi Wang Mei. I was just thinking… What is the meaning of life? 
Do you ever wonder about that?
Wang Mei: Oh, I see. You are thinking about your purpose in life. Yes, I think 
about that sometimes. But I also wonder about other things. For example, 
why are great people so successful? And how can we succeed in life?
Li Ming: Those are good questions, too. But… what is success? And how do 
you know if you’ve succeeded? Does it mean that you have a good job? Does 
it mean that you are rich and famous? 
Wang Mei: Those are all really important questions and very difficult to answer. 
I’m not sure how to answer them, but I think we should try our best to live a 
good and happy life.
Li Ming: That sounds right to me. My dad always says that we should be good 
to others. 
Wang Mei: Exactly! If we are living a happy life, but the people around us 
aren’t, is that a good life? I’m not so sure… It seems like something is 
missing.
Li Ming: I agree. I have an idea, 
Wang Mei. Let’s write these 
questions down and then survey 
our parents, friends and neighbours 
about their thoughts. 
Wang Mei: Great idea, Li Ming! 
Let’s do it!
­19
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and fill in the blanks.
1
After the history class, Li Ming sits in the classroom, deep in thought. Wang 
Mei comes in, and they start a ________. Li Ming wonders about the ________ 
of life. He has many questions about his purpose in life. Wang Mei thinks those 
questions are ________ to answer. They decide to ________ their questions 
________, and then ________ some people about their thoughts.
Listen to the passage and tick the ideas mentioned.
2
 Become famous.             	
	
 Have a happy family.
 Attend a good university.            	
 Make other people happy.
 Have a satisfying job.               		
 Be rich.
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
3
success      purpose      survey      wonder      neighbour
1. Work hard and you will be ________ in the future. 
2. I ________ who he was, but nobody could tell me. 
3. What is the ________ of your visit?
4. One of our ________ helped us look after our dog while we were away.
5. We ________ 500 people and 75% of them were in favour of the plan.
It’s said that happy people can live longer. What do you need to be 
happy? Fill in the mind map. Then give a reason for each thing you 
list. 
4
happiness
health
Example:
Health is important for living a full and active life. You need to be healthy to 
work and play. 
­20
Lesson 8: A Universe of Thought
• What is your attitude towards making mistakes?
• What have you learned from some of your past mistakes?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Albert Einstein was one of the greatest minds of the 
last century. During his lifetime, Einstein thought about 
the universe and solved many problems in physics. 
Einstein is most famous for his Theory of Relativity. 
Einstein’s early years
Einstein was born in Germany in 1879. After 
he finished school, he went on to study physics in 
Switzerland. In 1905, Einstein began to write articles and 
became a pioneer in the field of modern physics. For one 
of those articles, he received the Nobel Prize in 1921.
Einstein, the teacher
Einstein taught at universities in Switzerland and 
Germany. He left Germany in 1933 and went to teach 
at Princeton University in the United States.
Einstein died in 1955. He signed his last letter before 
he passed away. The letter asked people to give up 
nuclear weapons.
Einstein’s sayings
What do you do with your 
mind? You think! This is what 
I think: E=mc
2.
“The important thing is not to stop questioning.” 
“Anyone who has never made a mistake has never tried anything new.”
“I think and think for months and years. Ninety-nine times, the conclusion is 
false. The hundredth time I am right.”
Culture Tip
The Nobel Prize is widely regarded as the most important award in the 
fields of physics, chemistry, physiology or medicine, literature and peace. It was 
established by the will of the Swedish inventor Alfred Nobel in 1895. A sixth prize, 
for economics, was created in 1968. The 2015 Nobel Prize in Physiology or 
Medicine was awarded to Tu Youyou, a famous Chinese pharmaceutical chemist.
This is Princeton University, 
a famous university in the 
United States.
­21
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and fill in the blanks.
1
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words or phrases in 
the box.
3
Read the lesson again and answer the questions. 
2
1. In what field did Einstein solve many problems during his lifetime?
2. What is Einstein most famous for?
3. In what countries did Einstein teach?
4. What did he ask people to do in his last letter?
solve      pioneer      be famous for      go on     in the field of
1. Our country is outstanding ____________ modern science.
2. Hainan ____________ its fresh air and beautiful beaches.
3. The boy was very excited when he ____________ the crossword puzzle.
4. He was a ____________ of the May Fourth Movement.
5. He ____________ to study for his master’s degree after he finished university.
Work in groups. Who is your favourite Nobel Prize winner? What 
is his/her main achievement? Talk about him/her with your group 
members.
4
Task tips:
• When and where was he/she born?
• What did he/she do?
• What was he/she most famous for?
1879                   1905         1921     1933              1955
Einstein was born in ________.
Einstein became a pioneer in 
the field of ___________.
Einstein received ___________.
Einstein went to ________ at 
Princeton University.
Einstein ________.
­22
Lesson 9: China’s Most Famous “Farmer”
• Did you have a dream when you were a child? What was it?
• What do you think the life of a great person is like?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
A scientist in China had a dream 
when he was a child. In the dream, 
he grew a new type of rice that was 
as big as a peanut. The plant allowed 
farmers to rest in its shade. That child 
was Yuan Longping. 
In the 1960s, a few years after he 
finished his studies in agriculture 
at university, he came up with an 
idea for hybrid rice. Then he spent 
much of his time researching and 
developing new varieties.
In 1973, together with other scientists, he succeeded in developing hybrid rice. 
The introduction of this new product helped farmers produce much more rice and 
made China a leader in rice production. For this, he became known as the “Father 
of Hybrid Rice”. In 1980, the technology for hybrid rice was introduced to the 
United States and, later, to many other countries around the world. 
“Doing research is like high jumping,” Dr. Yuan once said. “A new height is 
waiting for you after each jump. You will fall behind if you give up jumping.” In 
2020, the 90-year-old was still setting higher goals for super hybrid rice. 
In his spare time, Dr. Yuan loved playing the violin and listening to music. 
Every night, he read for half an hour before he went to sleep. He liked 
swimming, too. 
Yuan Longping, the great scientist, passed away at the age of 91 in Changsha 
on May 22, 2021.
Dr. Yuan worked most of his life growing 
better rice.
­23
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. Yuan Longping grew a new type of rice as a child.	
	
(      )
2. He had an idea for hybrid rice in the 1960s.	 	
       	
(      )
3. He studied agriculture at university.	
	
	
       	
(      )
4. He was a scientist of many interests. 	 	
	
	
(      )
Read the lesson again and fill in the blanks.
2
People call Yuan Longping the “Father of Hybrid Rice”. In 1973, together 
with other scientists, he succeeded in ________  hybrid rice. The ________ of 
this new product helped farmers ________ much more rice and made China 
a leader in rice production. Yuan Longping was a scientist of wide interests 
outside his work. He loved playing the ________, listening to music, reading 
and swimming. 
Match and complete the sentences.
3
Work in groups. Can you think of an invention 
or a good way to make life better? What is it? 
Talk about it with your group members.
4
 1. Einstein signed a letter
 2. The boy became famous
 3. The scientists are doing   
the final test
 4. Mum often tells the boy  
a story
 5. Cici wants to be a painter
 they launch the rocket.
 he goes to bed. 
 she finishes school.
 he won that prize.
 he passed away.
before
after
­24
Lesson 10: Touch the World
• Have you heard of Helen Keller? What can you learn from her?
• Do you know any sign language?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
THE PLANETARY POST • JUNE 2, 1968
Helen Keller Dies at 88
Helen Keller, the well-known writer 
and educator, died yesterday at the age 
of 88. Helen Keller was a model for 
people around the world.
Helen was born in 1880 in the 
United States. When she was nineteen 
months old, Helen fell ill. She had a 
high fever that made her blind and 
deaf. Before her illness, Helen was a 
bright and happy girl. After she lost 
her ability to see and hear, she became 
difficult and wild. She often shouted 
and cried.
In 1887, a young teacher named 
Anne Sullivan, began to help Helen. 
She spelled words on Helen’s hand 
with her fingers. At first, the words 
didn’t mean anything to Helen. Then, 
one day, while Helen was playing in 
some water, Anne spelled W-A-T-E-R 
on Helen’s hand. Suddenly, Helen 
understood. That day, she learned 
many more words: mother, father, 
sister and teacher. Anne was filled with 
pride.
As Helen grew older, she made a 
lot of progress and learned to read. 
She had special books with letters that 
she could feel with her fingers. She 
also learned to write and even speak. 
When Helen studied at university, 
Anne sat beside her. She listened to 
the professors’ words and spelled them 
on Helen’s hand.
After Helen finished university, 
she visited many countries. She spoke 
about her life. She was very famous for 
her courage and hard work. She did her 
best to help others in the community 
who were deaf or blind. She tried to 
live her life without any regret.
She will be greatly missed.
­25
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
1. Who is Helen Keller?
2. What happened to Helen Keller when she was nineteen months old?
3. How did Anne Sullivan teach Helen Keller?
4. What was the first word that Helen Keller learned?
5. What was Helen Keller famous for?
Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
2
1. Mo Yan is a famous ________ who received the Nobel Prize in 2012.
2. The medicine did not help, and her ________ got worse.
3. She is excellent, and we trust her ________.
4. Keep on trying and you will make ________.
5. My aunt is a nurse and works in the ________ clinic.
ability      community      writer      progress      illness
Write sentences. Use the example as a guide.
3
She did her best to help others in the community who were deaf or blind.
       She did her best to help others  in the community. 
                                              They   were deaf or blind.
Work in groups. Have you heard of Stephen Hawking, Zhang Haidi 
or Huang Yangguang? What do you know about them? What can 
you learn from them? Talk about them.
4
1. Those students who study hard will pass the exam.
    ________________________________________________________
2. We know that woman who is an English teacher.
    ________________________________________________________
3. The basketball that you are looking for is behind the door.
    ________________________________________________________
Each of these sentences can be made into two sentences. Find the words 
that are modified by the attributive clauses. Can you find any rules? 
­26
Lesson 11: To China, with Love
• What makes a good doctor?
• Why do some doctors go to work in poor areas?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Norman Bethune was born in Canada in 1890. 
He was a famous doctor and a nice man.
In 1916, Norman Bethune graduated from the 
University of Toronto. With a lot of hard work, 
he found new ways to help people with T.B. — a 
disease that damages the lungs. He also invented 
tools that remain in use today.
Norman Bethune is well-known for helping 
the Chinese people during the War of Resistance 
against Japanese Aggression. In 1938, he made a 
decision to go to northern China because he knew 
many people were dying in the war. Bethune organized hospitals, taught doctors 
and nurses, and showed people how to give first aid. 
Dig In
Did you know that Bethune was not only an excellent doctor, but also 
an inventor and a political activist? He invented medical instruments and 
proposed reforms of medical care and health services in Canada. 
In China, Norman Bethune is a hero. People 
remember how hard he worked day after day 
in the worst possible conditions to help others. 
He once operated for sixty-nine hours straight 
without stopping. 
Norman Bethune died in Hebei. To 
remember him, the government set up Bethune 
Medical School and Bethune International 
Peace Hospital in Shijiazhuang.
­27
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. Bethune was an American doctor.	
	
	
 	
	
(      )
2. He finished university in 1916.	 	
	
	
   	
	
(      )
3. He came to northern China to help people in the war.  	
	
(      )
4. The Chinese government set up a school to remember him.		
(      )
What did Bethune do? Read the lesson and complete the list.
2
• He found new ways to _________________________________.
• He invented _________________________________________.
• He _________________________________________________.
• He _________________________________________________.
• He _________________________________________________.
• He once ____________________________________________.
Fill in the blanks with the words or phrases in the box.
3
remain      decision      condition      first aid      set up
1. He made a ________ to accept the challenging task.
2.	The volunteers ________ an organization to protect the environment.
3. Teenagers should have some knowledge about ________.
4. They live far away from each other, but they ________ close friends.
5. This plant can grow in the worst ________. It’s amazing!
Let’s do a quick quiz!
4
1. Who wrote The Story of My Life, a book that is translated into fifty 
languages?
2. Who asked people to give up nuclear weapons in his last letter before he 
passed away?
3. Who was the first on the list of rich-in-soul people in China in 2010?
4. What was the cause of Bethune’s death?
1. Helen Keller.    2. Albert Einstein.    3. Yuan Longping.    4. Blood poisoning.
Now, try to find more facts about great people.
­28
Lesson 12: Guess My Hero!
• In your opinion, what makes a hero?
• Who is your hero? What do you know about him/her?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Danny,
This week in class, we talked about success. We studied famous people and 
talked about our heroes.
On Monday, Ms. Liu asked us to make crossword puzzles based on facts 
about our heroes. I thought it would be fun because I did a lot of crossword 
puzzles when I was in Canada. 
But whom should my puzzle be about? I thought about it as I walked to and 
from school.
Then I had a great idea. My hero wouldn’t be anybody 
famous. It would be somebody who I like very much.
I’m sending you the puzzle so you can try to guess who it is.
Li Ming
Hi Li Ming,
I love your puzzle! You chose a very good hero. I hope he will be famous 
someday!
I showed the puzzle to Jenny and Brian after the chemistry class today. I told 
them that the puzzle was about a great person. I said that this person was the 
same age as them.
They couldn’t guess, so I helped them. I said that the 
person’s favourite food was donuts. Five minutes later, 
they finished the whole puzzle. I told them that you made 
it for me.
Thanks, Li Ming. Your puzzle was fun!
Danny
­29
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
1. What did Ms. Liu ask the class to do?
2. What did Danny think of Li Ming’s puzzle?
3. What did Danny say to help Jenny and Brian solve the puzzle?
4. How long did it take Jenny and Brian to solve the puzzle?
Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
2
whom      anybody      chemistry      government      medical   
1. A: For ________ is this book written?
    B: It’s written for young kids.
2. The ________ is making great efforts to help people live better.
3. I don’t want to be ________ else. I just want to be myself.
4. Many ________ teams entered Wenchuan after the earthquake.
5. In ________ experiments, interesting things can happen.
WHO’S YOUR HERO?
PROJECT
Write a short paragraph about your hero. Then use words from 
your paragraph to make a crossword puzzle. Give your paragraph and 
crossword puzzle to a friend. Can your friend solve your puzzle? 
Here is Li Ming’s puzzle as an example.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ACROSS
1. This is his favourite food. (It’s sweet 
and round.)
3. His skin is this colour.
5. He likes this sweet drink.
6. I laugh because he’s __________.
7. Since he’s tall, he’s good at this game.
DOWN
1. He’s this kind of animal.
2. He’s not short. He’s __________.
4. He comes from this country.
5. He also likes this food. (It’s round and 
delicious!)
p o
p
­30
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Grammar in Use
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the given words.
1. Hebei Province lies in the ________ (north) part of China.
2. Could you please tell me the ________ (mean) of this word?
3. Will you go or stay? What is your ________ (decide)?
4. There were more wild animals living on the earth ________ (century) ago.
5. That factory ________ (produce) two types of new machines last year.
6. As the ________ (lead) of this office, he can work with everyone.
I. Complete the sentences in your own words.
1. The children sang happily as _____________________________.
2. _____________________________ before I went to bed last night.
3. _____________________________ after he arrived home from school.
II. Replace the circled words with the expressions in the box.
  
1. Brian showed us a book filled with stamps.
2. Can you see the yellow kite  flying  in the sky?
3. Nancy is a Canadian girl  with  blue eyes and blond hair.
Listening and Speaking
I. Listen to the dialogue and tick the correct answers.
1. What title did Kate win in her city?
    
 Great Kid.	 	
	
	
	
 Super Kid.
2. Why was she chosen as that?
    
 Because she helped other students.	
 Because she helped the homeless.
3. What does she like to do in her spare time?
    
 To buy food.	
	
	
	
 To play basketball.
who has       that was filled with       that is flying
­31
Putting It All Together
Read the passage and answer the question.
Deng Jiaxian
Deng Jiaxian was born in Huaining, Anhui Province, 
on June 25, 1924. He entered the Physics Department 
of the Southwest Associated University in 1941. After 
graduation in 1945, he taught in middle schools and later in the Physics 
Department of Peking University. In 1948, he was admitted to the Graduate 
School of Purdue University in the United States and received a PhD 
in physics two years later. Nine days after he got his doctoral degree, 
he stepped onto the ship back to China and started his creative nuclear 
theoretical research.
Deng Jiaxian set up classes, giving lessons himself and organizing people 
to translate and study relevant foreign language materials. At the same time, 
he never gave up on his ideas regarding the main direction of atomic bomb 
development. Following the successful test of the atomic bomb, Deng and 
his team joined the research group led by Yu Min in 1965 and immediately 
started designing the hydrogen bomb. Within no more than one year, the 
Deng-Yu Project was submitted, which greatly accelerated China’s hydrogen 
bomb development and realization.
In the nuclear experiments, Deng always stood in the front line and 
never made his colleagues do the dangerous work for him. Unfortunately, 
he got radiation sickness in the early 1980s. However, he continued to 
work in spite of his illness until 1985 when he was unable to avoid being 
hospitalized. 
II. Make up a dialogue with your partner based on Marie Curie’s file.
Marie Curie’s File
Name: Marie Curie
Date and place of birth: November 7, 1867, Poland
Achievements: won her first Nobel Prize for physics along with her husband 
                          in 1903; won a second Nobel Prize for chemistry in 1911
Date and cause of death: July 4, 1934, died of radiation poisoning
What is her name?
When and where was she born?
What are her achievements?
­32
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
You can make the world,
A better place to live.
You can make the world,
A better place.
You become a hero,
When you care for those around you.
Set a good example,
Day after day.
Make the World a Better Place
I. Talking about Great People and 
Their Lives
Albert Einstein was one of the                   
greatest minds of the last century.             
                                                                     
I can introduce people in English. 
II. Adverbial Clause with “before”, 
“after”, “as”
Every night, he read for half an hour  
before he went to sleep.                                        
                                                                          
I can use adverbial clauses with 
“before”, “after”, “as” properly. 
III. Attributive Clause with “who”, 
“that”
She had a high fever that made her         
blind and deaf.                                                                   
                                                                                     
 I can use attributive clauses with 
“who”, “that” properly.
Then you will make the world,
A better place to live.
You will make the world,
A better place.
What can you learn from the great scientist?
Deng Jiaxian passed away on July 29, 1986. He is regarded as the “Founding 
Father of China’s A-Bomb and H-Bomb”.
­33
Lessons 13 ~ 18
Safety
Functions
 Reminding and Warning
Grammar
 Imperatives
Structures
 Don’t use water to put out kitchen fires.
 Be careful with scissors and knives! 
 If you see a fire, quickly move outdoors to an 
   open area.
UNIT
3
We Will Learn
­34
Lesson 13: Be Careful, Danny!
• Have you ever climbed onto a chair or a desk to reach something? 
Was it safe?
• What should you do if you see someone fall?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Danny, Jenny and Brian are decorating the art classroom.
Danny: Look at this yellow star, Brian and Jenny! Isn’t it beautiful? I’m going to 
hang it from the ceiling over the desk. 
Brian: Let me get the ladder for you.
Danny: I don’t need a ladder. I think I’m tall enough. 
(Danny can’t reach the ceiling, so he climbs onto Mr. 
Jones’ chair.)
Danny: Almost… Almost… Aaaaaaahhhh! 
(Danny falls.)
Mr. Jones: What was that noise?! 
(He sees Danny lying on the floor.) 
Mr. Jones: Danny, are you all right? Are you hurt?
Danny: Hmm… My tail hurts a little, but it’s not serious.
Brian: (He whispers.) Help! 
(They hear Brian’s cry for help, but 
his voice is very weak.) 
Mr. Jones: Brian? Where are you? 
Brian: I’m under Danny! 
Danny: Oh no! (He jumps up.) I’m 
really sorry! Are you OK, Brian?
Brian: No, I’m not OK. I tried to catch you, but you landed on top of me. My 
arm hurts.
Jenny: Shall I call an ambulance? 
Brian: No, that’s not necessary. I don’t think my arm is broken.
Mr. Jones: Jenny, please call Brian’s mother. Tell her we are taking Brian to the 
hospital.
­35
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
1. What were Danny, Jenny and Brian doing?
2. What did Danny climb onto?
3. Did Brian need an ambulance?
4. Who is Jenny going to call?
Read the lesson again and fill in the blanks.
2
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
3
safe      hang      serious      necessary
1. There is a beautiful painting ________ on the wall.
2. It’s ________ to drink eight glasses of water every day.
3. The school is concerned about the ________ of the children.
4. The damage caused by the thunderstorm is ________.
Work in groups of five. One of you can be the narrator. The others 
can be Danny, Brian, Mr. Jones and Jenny. Role-play the story.
4
What happened 
today in the art 
classroom?
Danny was going to ________ a star from 
the ceiling. He thought he was tall ________ 
and didn’t need a ladder.
Danny fell down from the chair. Brian tried 
to ________ Danny, but Danny ________ 
on top of him.
Danny’s tail hurt a little, but it was not 
________. Brian’s ________ hurt, too.
Beginning
Middle
End
­36
Lesson 14: Accidents Happen
• What do you need to do when you cross the street?
• What should you do when you see someone badly hurt in an 
accident?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
NORTH TOWN, Alberta: Thirteen-year-old 
Ann Brown was hit by a car at 15 Park Road. 
The accident happened at about 7:30 a.m. She 
and her brother, James, were on their way to 
an early basketball practice.
“We were in a hurry,” James told the reporter. 
“We didn’t want to be late for practice. Ann 
dropped her basketball, and it rolled onto the 
street. She raced to get it.”
Northern News, December 7
Girl, 13, Hit by Car
Mrs. Andrews, who was walking several steps 
behind the two students, saw it happen.  “I don’t know whose fault it was,” 
Mrs. Andrews said. “The girl didn’t see the car. And the street was icy — the 
car couldn’t stop in time. It was terrible.”
Mrs. Andrews said that she could see what was going to happen. “I shouted 
to the girl. I wanted to stop her from running after the ball, but she didn’t hear 
me.” After the accident, the car stopped, and the driver, Bill Morin, jumped out. 
He called an ambulance.
Mr. Morin knows first aid. He did not move Ann. He stopped traffic on the 
road until the ambulance came. Then the ambulance took both students to the 
hospital.
Ann has a broken leg and an ugly shoulder wound. She is recovering in the 
hospital. Doctors say she can expect to return to school in about a week.
­37
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and match the actions with the right person.
1
Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
2
ugly      wound      recover      expect      town
1. “Don’t worry! You will ________ soon,” the doctor says.
2. The ________ duckling grew into a beautiful swan.
3. We went on a holiday to a small ________ in France.
4. “Please show me your ________,” the doctor says.
5. We all ________ the foreign teachers to visit our school next week.
REPORT ON AN ACCIDENT
PROJECT
Imagine you are a reporter. You are going to report on an accident. 
What are you going to write? 
You can answer these questions:
• When and where did the accident happen?
• How did the accident happen? Who was the victim?
• Who was there when the accident happened? Did they help?
• How did the doctor save the victim?
• What was the result of the accident?
You can interview these people:
• the victim
• the witness
• the doctor
knows first aid.
stopped traffic on the road.
dropped the basketball and 
raced to get it.
wanted to stop the girl from 
running after the ball.
Ann Brown
James
Mrs. Andrews
Bill Morin
shouted a warning.
called an ambulance.
was hit by a car.
was on the way to a 
basketball practice 
with Ann.
­38
Lesson 15: My Helmet Saved My Life!
• How do you get to school?
• Are you always careful when you ride your bicycle? Why or 
why not?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
It was a beautiful fall day. I was out riding my bicycle. 
I guess I rode over a hole in the road. All of a sudden, 
WHAM! I went down hard on my right side. That really 
hurt!
My head hit the ground. I lay there for a few minutes. I 
tried to get up, but I couldn’t! “There’s something wrong 
with me,” I thought. I felt so terrible that I lay down again. 
Then I saw blood on my shoe. My hand and knee were 
bleeding.
As I lay there, I took off my helmet. There was a sharp 
rock sticking out of it. It was pretty scary to look at. Thank 
goodness I wore my helmet!
I shouted for help. A stranger stopped his truck and came 
to help me. He put my bike in the back of his truck and drove me to the hospital.
When my mother got to the hospital, she gave me a big hug. “I’m so glad you 
were wearing your helmet,” she said. She knew I was careless and did not always 
wear my helmet.
But I’ll never be careless again! My bicycle helmet saved my life!
Dig In
Cycling is fun. But before getting on a bicycle, you should double check 
the following things:
1. You have a helmet. A helmet protects your head, which can get hurt in 
a bicycle accident.
My name is Jackie. I like 
cycling.
2. The brakes work OK. No brakes, no cycling.
3. The light is still working. Being able to see is 
really important at night.
4. The tyres are neither too full nor too flat. This 
will ensure that you have a pleasant trip.
­39
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. She was riding her bicycle when she fell.	
	
	
	
(      )
2. Her head hit the ground.		
	
	
	
	
	
(      )
3. She stood up and shouted for help.	
	
	
	
	
(      )
4. Her friend came to help and drove her to the hospital.	
	
(      )
5. Her bicycle helmet saved her life.	
	
	
	
	
(      )
Listen to the passage and tick the sentences mentioned.
2
 Check the brakes, light and tyres.
 Ride on the sidewalk.
 Make a way for people walking. 
 Don’t play with others.
 Wear light-coloured clothes.
 Follow the traffic signs and rules.
 Always wear your helmet.
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
3
blood      knee      stick      stranger      careless   
1. I hurt my ________, and it’s painful when I walk.
2. Although they were ________, they got on very well with each other.
3. He stopped the car and found a nail ________ in the tyre.
4. It is an honour for everyone to give ________.
5. He failed the exam because he was so ________ with his spelling.
Work in groups. Discuss what you should do to keep safe when 
you ride a bicycle. Then write a short passage and present it to the 
class.
4
Everything ready? Go!
­40
Lesson 16: How Safe Is Your Home?
• What place makes you feel the most comfortable?
• Do you think your home is a safe place? Why or why not?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Your home is a safe place, right?
Think again!
Many serious accidents happen in people’s homes.
The kitchen and the bathroom are the two most dangerous rooms in the house. 
Why? Because most accidents happen in the kitchen and the bathroom.
Can people prevent certain accidents? Yes. Many accidents happen because 
people are careless. So be careful!
Safety tips for preventing accidents in the kitchen
• Don’t stand on chairs. Many people hurt 
themselves by falling off chairs.
• Don’t use water to put out kitchen fires. Use 
baking soda or salt instead.
• Be careful with scissors and knives! Many 
people cut themselves in the kitchen.
• Don’t keep poisons in the kitchen.
• Be careful with fire and heat when you cook. 
You don’t want to burn yourself.  
Safety tips for preventing 
accidents in the bathroom
• Never use electricity in the shower 
or bathtub. It can hurt you!
• It’s easy to slip and fall on a wet 
floor. Be sure to keep the bathroom floor 
dry after you have a shower or bath. 
Some things catch fire easily. 
Don’t put them near the stove!
Accidents happen suddenly. Never leave 
small children alone in a bathtub. 
­41
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and complete the table.
1
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words from the lesson. 
The first letter is given.
2
Scalding       Cuts       Falls       Burns
1. Tom won’t drive to Beijing. He’ll take a bus i________. 
2. We should eat less s________ to prevent heart disease. 
3. Take the k________ away. The little boy may cut himself. 
4. A hot coal fell out the fire and b________ the shoes.
5. Grandma likes to sit in the sun. She enjoys the h________ of the sun.
Read the passage and fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
3
Be Careful!
Here are some of the most common accidents that happen at home:
  Scalding   — Hot water or drinks can scald you badly. Be careful when you 
smell your coffee and want to drink it right away!
________ — Every year, quite a lot of children fall and hurt themselves. 
They fall off furniture or down the stairs. Climbing trees, high walls or 
fences can be dangerous, too.
________ — Many people are badly burnt or even die in house fires. A 
cigarette can easily start a fire. People can be burnt by a hot iron or matches.
________ — Glass causes the most serious cuts. So do knives and scissors. 
These things should be kept away from children.
Make a poster. What should you do to stay safe at home? Give 
more tips for home safety. 
4
Safety tips for preventing accidents
in the kitchen
Safety tips for preventing accidents
in the bathroom
Dos
Don’ts
Dos
Don’ts
Example: 
Be careful with hot water. 
Don’t climb trees or high walls. 
­42
Lesson 17: Staying Safe in an Earthquake
• Have you ever experienced an earthquake? When and where?
• What is the first thing you should do when an earthquake 
happens?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Earthquakes usually come without 
warning. What should you do if this 
happens to you? Stay calm as the earth 
begins to shake and move. An earthquake 
is dangerous, but there are things you can 
do to protect yourself. 
If you are inside when the earthquake 
starts, get under a table or a bed. You 
need to have something strong around 
you to protect you from falling objects. 
Do not stand near walls or windows and stay out of the kitchen. The kitchen is 
dangerous because there are so many glass objects. Also, never get into a lift 
during an earthquake.
If you are outside, get to an open area as fast as you can. Stay away from 
buildings and trees. If you are in a car, pull over to a place where there are no 
trees or tall buildings and stay in the car. If you are close to the sea, try to get as 
far away from the water as possible. Earthquakes can cause huge waves that can 
really harm the people nearby.
When the earthquake is over, there is still plenty of danger. If you see a fire, 
quickly move outdoors to an open area. Keep an eye out for things that can fall on 
you. If you have a phone, use it only once to call your family or a friend. Too many 
calls will bring down the phone system. Your chances of survival in an earthquake 
go up if you stay calm. Staying calm is not easy, but it can save your life.
Earthquakes are terrible.
Learning Tip
An earthquake is a sudden shaking of the ground. 
It happens because there is movement in the earth’s 
crust.
­43
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and match the sentences.
1
use it once to call your family or a friend.
get as far away from the water as possible.
get under a table or a bed.
move outdoors to an open area.
pull over to a place where there are no 
trees or tall buildings.
How can you stay safe in an earthquake? Complete the chart.
2
Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box.
3
1. When there is an emergency, it is important to ____________.
2. The volunteers make great efforts to ____________ the animals 
____________ going extinct.
3. He had to ____________ because he was so tired after three hours of driving.
4. The sign said: _____________ for falling rocks.
Work in pairs. What can you do to help after an earthquake? 
Discuss your ideas.
4
pull over     stay calm     protect… from     keep an eye out
Inside
Outside
After the earthquake 
Dos
• ________ a table  
  or a bed.
• ________ an open 
  area as fast as you can.
• ________ to a safe 
  place if you are in a car.
• ________ to an open area 
  if you see a fire.
• ________ things that can 
  fall on you.
Don’ts
• ________ near 
  walls or windows.
• ________ the 
  kitchen.
• Never ________ 
  a lift.
• ________ from the 
  buildings and trees.
• ________ from the 
  water if you are
  close to the sea.
• ________ your phone  
  more than once.
We can donate some money to help people rebuild their homes. 
We can help people by offering some psychological treatment. 
Example:
1. If you are inside,
2. If you are in a car,	
3. If you are near the sea,
4. If you have a phone,
5. If there is fire,
­44
Lesson 18: Never Catch a Dinosaur
• Have you ever learned a lesson from an accident?
• Is it important to listen to other people’s warnings? Why or 
why not?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Brian,
I got your e-mail. I like your new rule. I will never try to catch a falling 
dinosaur. It isn’t safe!
Danny also wrote to me about the accident. He felt bad because he was 
careless. You advised him to use a ladder, but he didn’t listen. He was lucky 
you were there to catch him. But I guess you weren’t so lucky.
Accidents happen so suddenly. I remember when I was seven years old, my 
mother took me to the park one day. I saw a big tree. My mother tried to stop 
me, but I really wanted to climb the tree. I told her I would be careful.
“Don’t climb too high,” she warned.
She watched me climb higher and higher. “Look at me, Mother!” I shouted. “I 
can almost touch the sky!”
“That’s too high,” she called. “Be careful, Li Ming!”
Suddenly, the branch broke. I fell. My mother tried to catch me, but she 
couldn’t. I hit the ground very hard. 
There was something wrong with my leg. It hurt! I couldn’t move it. My 
mum took me to the hospital. At the hospital, the doctor said my leg was 
broken.
It took me three months to recover. I couldn’t attend ping-pong training that 
year! 
Now, I always listen to my mother’s 
warnings about safety. 
By the way, do you like the gift I sent you?
Take care,
Li Ming
Wow! I’ll wear it with 
this T-shirt from Danny!
­45
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. Danny felt terrible because of his carelessness.	
(      )
2. Li Ming broke his leg at the age of seven.	
	
(      )
3. Li Ming tried to climb a ladder, but he fell down.	
(      )
4. Li Ming’s mother caught him and saved him.		
(      )
5. It took Li Ming about 90 days to recover.	
	
(      )
Read the lesson again and fill in the blanks.
2
One day, Li Ming went to the park with his mother. He ________ a big tree 
even though his mother tried to ________ him. When he got ________ and 
________, he became so excited that he thought he could almost ________ the 
sky. But suddenly, the ________ broke, he fell and ________ the ground very 
hard. He couldn’t ________ his leg. It ________. He couldn’t attend ping-pong 
________ that year. Poor Li Ming!
Here are some safety rules for teenagers. Read them and fill in the 
blanks with the words in the box.
3
When you are going out, please remember the following things:
• Always tell your ________ where you are going and when you expect to 
be home.
• Don’t carry a lot of ________ with you.
• Try not to walk on quiet and dark streets in the ________.
• Make sure you know what ________ to call for the police, ambulance and 
so on.
When you are at school, you should follow these rules:
• Walk on the right-hand ________ of the stairs.
• Don’t bring ________ or alcohol to school.
• Don’t carry sharp things like knives or scissors in your ________.
• Report to your teacher if you want to ________ during school hours.
money       number       parents       evening
side       leave       cigarettes       pocket
­46
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Grammar in Use
I. Find and circle the words from this unit. 
It is not safe when people are not c________. S________ accidents often 
happen and injure many people. A lot of people lose their lives. For example, 
many people drive after drinking. They don’t care about the r________. 
Society must work together to p________ drunk drivers f________ harming 
others and themselves.
A new library will soon open 
in your school. Help the 
librarian write a notice to 
the students.
Notice to students
1. Show your library card to the librarian.
2. Don’t talk in the reading room.
3. Never…
4. Please…
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
II. Complete the passage with the correct words. The first letter is given.
a
n
d
h
h
a
n
g
s
v
b
e
x
p
e
c
t
r
a
c
k
c
e
i
a
m
p
u
l
a
n
e
f
j
t
n
q
l
t
r
i
s
t
r
a
n
g
e
r
e
f
s
h
o
u
l
d
e
r
l
e
a
r
t
h
q
u
a
k
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
t
s
c
y
g
k
l
o
r
s
u
s
­47
Listening and Speaking
Putting It All Together
I. Listen to the dialogues and tick the correct answers.
1. What does Tom mean?
    
 He is going to fall.		
	
 He will be fine.
2. What happened to the man?
    
 He fell off the ladder.	
	
 He fell off the fence.
3. Why is Tony driving so fast?
    
 He is rushing to the hospital.	
 He is rushing to the airport.
II. What would you say if the following things happened?
1. Someone is climbing up high.
2. Your friend often plays computer games through the night.
3. There is heavy traffic, and a little boy runs into the street to get his ball back.
4. The floor is wet, and someone is walking by.
5. A man is smoking in the non-smoking area.
• Always wear a seatbelt.
• Follow the traffic signs and rules.
• Don’t drive after drinking.
• Don’t make phone calls while driving.
• Walk on the sidewalk. 
• Cross the street at the crosswalk.
• Pay attention to the traffic lights.
• Don’t read while walking.
• Always wear a helmet.
• Check your bicycle or motorcycle often.
• Don’t play with others while riding.
A. Rules for pedestrians
B. Rules for cyclists and 
     motorcyclists
C. Rules for drivers
I. Look at the rules for different groups of people. Match the rules with the 
correct groups.
­48
II. Make a poster.
In a group of four, make a poster about how to prevent accidents inside or outside 
school. What should students do to be safe? What should they NOT do? 
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
I. Reminding and Warning
Be careful with scissors and knives!      
                                                                           
I can remind or warn people in English.
II. Imperatives 
Don’t stand on chairs.                                                      
                                                                          
I can use imperatives properly. 
Be careful when you
ZOOM down the waterslide,
CLIMB up the mountainside,
RACE on a bike ride.
To take an ambulance is not a happy ride.
Have fun, but please take care!
Be careful when you
GO at the green light,
TURN your bike left or right,
JUMP from too high a height.
So don’t be careless when you 
go to ride your bike.
Have fun, but please take care!
Please Take Care!
­49
Lessons 19 ~ 24
Stories and Poems
Functions
 Enjoying Literature
Grammar
 Past Continuous Tense
 Modal Verb: must
Structures
 Each line has a set number of words.
 One day, when he was cutting wood beside a lake,
   he lost his axe in the water.
 A good story must have great characters and an  
  interesting plot.
UNIT
4
We Will Learn
­50
Lesson 19: A Story or a Poem?
• Do you have a favourite poem or story? What is it?
• Have you ever tried to write a poem? 
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Jenny: Have you finished your 
English homework yet, Brian?
Brian: No. I just started writing my 
poem. Ms. Cox said we could write 
a story or a poem, right? 
Jenny: Yes. I haven’t decided which 
one to write yet. I feel that it’s 
easier to write a story. You should 
write one, too.
Danny: I don’t think so. Compared 
with poems, stories usually have 
longer passages. Every story must 
have a beginning, a middle and an 
end. It takes too much time to write 
a story.
Jenny: That’s true. But a story doesn’t 
limit you like a poem does. With 
poems, you need to think about 
format, rhyme and meaning. You 
must use words very carefully 
because so few words are used in 
poems.
Danny: I know, but I still think it’s 
easier to write a short poem.
Jenny: Although a poem has fewer 
words, it’s not always easier to write. 
Every word must have power and 
meaning. If you think about it, it can 
take a long time to come up with the 
right words. Sometimes writing less 
takes more effort than writing more. 
Danny: It is hard, but I did it. I 
described something I love. Would 
you like to hear my poem?
Brian: You’ve already finished?
Danny: Yes! It was easy!
Jenny: We’d love to hear your poem, 
Danny.
The Donut
When I wake up on a warm sunny morning in spring,
A hot, fresh and fat donut is my favourite thing.
The smell of it gets me up on my feet, 
Like it’s calling me aloud to eat! 
With this sweet circle in my mouth,
I like to think about going south.
There, with my parents, I can go for a short stay,
To sit in the sunshine eating donuts all day!
­51
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and fill in the blanks with the correct words.
1
Brian, Jenny and Danny learned about poems and stories this week. Their 
teacher, Ms. Cox, told them to write a ________ or a poem. Brian started 
writing his ________. Jenny thought it was easier to write a story than to write 
a poem. But Danny didn’t think so. He said, “________ with poems, stories are 
usually longer.” Jenny said, “A story doesn’t limit you like a ________ does. 
With poems, every word must have ________ and meaning. Sometimes writing 
less takes ________ effort than writing more.”
Read the lesson again and compare poems with stories.
2
a. It must have a beginning, a middle and an end.
b. Although it is short, every word must have power and meaning.
c. Usually fewer words are used.
d. It is longer and has more words. 
e. You have to think about the format. 
Try to change Danny’s poem with words you like. Share your new 
poem with your classmates. 
3
When I wake up on a warm sunny morning in spring,
A _________ (adjective), _________ (adjective) and
_________ (adjective) _________ (food) is my favourite thing.
The smell of it gets me up on my feet,
Like it’s calling me aloud to eat!
With this _________ (adjective) ________ (noun) in my mouth,
I like to think about going south.
There, with my _________ (person), I can go for a short stay,
To sit in the sunshine eating _________ (food) all day!
poems
stories
­52
Lesson 20: Say It in Five
• Read a few old Chinese poems. Do they follow a pattern?
• What pattern does a five-line poem follow?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Look at the poem on the right. It has five lines of text. This style was created 
in the nineteenth century by an American poet. This kind of poem always talks 
Here is how you can write your own five-line poem.
Line 1: In one word, state the topic of your poem. Use a noun.
Line 2: Describe your topic in two words. Use a noun and an adjective or two 
adjectives.
Line 3: Choose three words that describe what your topic does.
Line 4: Express a thought or a feeling about your topic in four words. You can 
use any type of words here.
Line 5: Say something about your topic in one word.
Computer
Bright screen
Humming with information
Show me the world
Connect
about a single topic. Each line has a set 
number of words. The first line has one 
word. The second line has two words. 
The third, or middle line has three words. 
The fourth line has four words. The last 
line has one word.
Let’s look at another two poems as 
examples.
Cat
Smooth fur
Sleeping, waking, stretching
You are like water
Liquid
Happiness
Light, bright
Smiling quickly, laughing
What colour are you?
Sunshine!
­53
Let’s Do It!
Match and complete the format of a five-line poem.
1
Line 1		
	
	
three words
Line 2		
	
	
four words (any kind)
Line 3		
	
	
one noun
Line 4		
	
	
one noun and one adjective or two adjectives
Line 5		
	
	
one word
Choose something around you or in a picture. Collect some words 
to describe it.
2
Work in pairs. Choose words from your word collection above in 
Activity 2, and write a five-line poem. Share your poem with your 
classmates.
3
________
________ ________
________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ 
nouns
verbs
adjectives
adverbs
­54
Lesson 21: The Fable of the Woodcutter 
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
• Do you like reading fables? What fables have you read?
• Do you think it is important to be honest? Why?
Long ago, there was a good and honest woodcutter. One day, when he was 
cutting wood beside a lake, he lost his axe in the water. The water was deep, and 
he could not get his axe back. He had only one axe, and he needed it to make his 
living. He sat down and began to cry. As he cried, a spirit appeared. She asked 
the man what was wrong. She listened to the woodcutter and felt sorry for him. 
But what could she do to help? Suddenly she came up with a great idea. The spirit 
dove into the lake and brought back a gold axe. 
“Is this the axe you lost?” asked the good spirit. The man looked at the gold 
axe, knowing it wasn’t his. Because he was honest, he admitted to the spirit that it 
wasn’t his axe. 
Learning Tip
This story is adapted from a European fable. A fable is a fictional story about 
animals, plants, forces of nature, etc. It always has a moral lesson.
So the spirit dove into the 
water again and brought back a 
silver axe. Once again, the man 
said that was not his axe. The 
spirit went down a third time and 
returned with the woodcutter’s old 
axe. “That is the right one!” said 
the woodcutter. The spirit was 
so happy with the woodcutter’s 
honesty that she gave him the 
other two axes as presents.
Honesty truly is the best policy.
­55
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
Let’s Do It!
1. What happened to the woodcutter when he was cutting wood beside a lake?
2. Who appeared as the woodcutter cried?
3. How did the woodcutter get back his old axe?
4. Why did the spirit give the woodcutter the other two axes as presents?
Read the lesson again. Think about the spirit and the woodcutter. 
Match each person with the words that describe them.
2
 
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words or phrases in 
the box.
3
silver        admit        make one’s living        come up with        dive into
1. He ____________ to his parents that he broke the window. They were happy
    with his honesty. 
2. That old lady is very poor. She ____________ by selling newspapers.
3. I’m afraid to ____________ the swimming pool.
4. He ____________ a fun way to learn maths. 
5. She wore a ____________ chain around her neck.
Work in groups to learn more about fables. You can do one of the 
following tasks:
4
• Find the rest of the fable on the Internet. Act it out. 
• Find another fable and act it out. You can search on the Internet or look in 
books. Don’t forget to find the moral in your fable.
warm-hearted
dishonest
kind
poor
helpful
clever
honest
foolish
­56
Learning Tip
Lesson 22: The Giant ( I )
• Do you like reading fairy tales? 
• Do you know any famous fairy tales? What are they?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Once upon a time, there was a large, lovely garden. Its grass was soft and 
green. Its trees were filled with singing birds. Every afternoon, children would 
play in the garden after school. They ran in the grass and climbed the trees. They 
loved to listen to the singing of the birds. How happy they were! 
One day the children were playing in the garden 
when a giant appeared. “What are you doing here?” 
the giant cried in a loud voice. “This is my garden! 
You must leave immediately!” The children were 
frightened. They ran away and dared not come back. 
The next day, the giant built a high wall around his 
garden and put a notice on a board: DO NOT ENTER! 
The poor children no longer had a place to play. 
Summer turned to fall and fall turned to winter. 
When spring came, flowers blossomed and the birds began to sing across the land. 
But in the giant’s garden, it was still winter. The green grass was covered with 
snow, and the cold winds kept the birds away. “I don’t understand why spring is 
so late coming to my garden this year,” said the giant. He felt sad as he looked 
through the window at his frozen, white garden. 
One morning as the giant was lying awake in 
his bed, he heard lovely music coming through 
the window. He thought it must be the king’s 
musicians passing by. “Perhaps spring has come 
at last,” he said as he jumped out of his bed and 
looked outside.
What did the giant see?
A fairy tale is a story that often has characters like fairies, dwarfs, giants or 
mermaids. This fairy tale is adapted from The Selfish Giant by Oscar Wilde. 
He was one of London’s most popular playwrights in the early 1890s.
­57
Read the lesson and number the scenes in the correct order.
1
Let’s Do It!
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words or phrases in 
the box.
2
run away      pass by      enter      awake 
1. I see them ________ my house every day.
2. They were not allowed to ________ the theatre without tickets.
3. I’m so sleepy that I can hardly stay ________. 
4. The fox ________ before the hunter could shoot it. 
 The children were playing in the giant’s garden. 
 The giant built a high wall around his garden and put a notice on a board: 
DO NOT ENTER!
 Spring came, but it was still winter in the giant’s garden.
 The giant came back and drove the children away.
Complete the answers with the information given and find out who 
the criminal is in the story.
3
Mary Sheep lost her child. Detective Monkey thinks the baby was stolen 
between 9:30 and 10:00 last night. He is questioning some suspects.
What were you doing between 9:30 and 10:00 last night?
Well, we had a birthday party for Panda last night. 
I was talking with (talk with) Fox at that time. We 
were also helping Panda clean the room. 
Let me think. I went to Panda’s Party at 7:00, and I left at 9:30. 
Between 9:30 and 10:00, I ____________ (take a walk) with Fox. 
I ____________ (clean) my room at that time. Yesterday was 
my birthday. Lots of friends came to my home. Most of them 
left at 9:30. But Tiger and Fox stayed late and helped me. 
I was at Panda’s home with Tiger. We ____________ (help) 
Panda while we were talking. At about 10:00, I left the party. 
On my way home, I met Wolf and we took a walk together. 
­59
Let’s Do It!
1 Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. The giant saw something wonderful after he jumped out of his bed.   (      )
2. The children entered the garden by way of the gate.	 	
	
    (      )
3. The giant let only one little boy play in his garden.	 	
	
    (      )
4. Along with the children came the spring.		
	
 	
	
    (      ) 
1 Read Danny’s diary about The Selfish Giant and fill in the blanks. 
The first letter is given.
2
I really enjoyed The Selfish Giant when I first read it. This story is about
a selfish g________ who later changed. At first he thought only about 
himself. He didn’t care about others at all. He didn’t like the children playing 
in his g________, and he drove them away. The following spring, his garden 
was c________ with snow, and the cold winds kept the birds away.
The giant was sad. He didn’t know why spring hadn’t come. One day, to his 
surprise, he saw some children coming back to his garden through a
h________ in the garden wall. As soon as the children came back to the 
garden, spring returned with them. It was lovely! The giant’s heart melted. 
He k________ down the wall. E________ since that day the children have 
always had a place to play. It’s a really moving story with a wonderful moral.
1 Match the titles with the key words. Choose one of the tales and 
describe it.
3
the wicked queen, the magic mirror, 
seven dwarfs, a poisoned apple
a mother duck, an ugly bird, the lake, 
swans
grandmother, the woods, a big wolf, 
hunter, heavy stones 
the sea, five sisters, the prince, the Sea 
Witch, a spirit
a talking rabbit, a hole, the Queen of 
Hearts, Mad Hatter
The Little Mermaid
The Ugly Duckling
Little Red Riding Hood
Snow White and the Seven 
Dwarfs
Alice in Wonderland
­60
• Which do you prefer to write, poems or stories?
• Why do you think Danny was afraid to write a poem?
Lesson 24: Writing a Poem
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Diary,
We learned to write stories and poems this week. We read many 
different kinds of poems. We also learned about fables and fairy tales.
I like reading stories, but they are very hard to write. I think a good 
story must have great characters and an interesting plot. Jenny thinks 
stories are easier to write than poems, but I don’t think so. 
At the beginning, I was afraid to try writing a poem. I tried to write 
one about my favourite place beside a lake. But it was too hard to write 
that poem! Then my teacher encouraged me to write a humorous poem 
because I am always saying funny things. So I wrote a funny poem 
about a donut. Later I decided to write a poem about a cat! Here it is.
                    Cat
I once saw a very small cat, 
It was wearing a big yellow hat.
I jumped really high, and then I said quietly, 
Don’t you think you look funny in that?
­61
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Danny learned how to write songs last week.	 	
	
	
(      )
2. Danny likes reading stories.	
	
	
	
	
	
(      )
3. Danny thinks stories are easier to write.	
	
	
	
(      )
WRITE A POEM
As a class, think of words that describe things like age, size, 
temperature, feelings and colour. Then think of words that describe 
PROJECT
Use “must” to complete the dialogues. Then practice the dialogues 
with a partner.
2
Son: Mum, may I watch TV for a while? 
Mum: No. It’s 10:00 in the evening. You ________  go to sleep now.
Student: Sorry, Mr. Hill. I am late for school.
Headmaster: Come to school on time tomorrow. As a student, you ________ 
follow the rules of the school. 
Policeman: You ________ slow down when you pass by a school. 
Driver: Sorry, sir!
how things move. Make lists of these words on the blackboard. In small 
groups, ask your groupmates for words to fill in the blanks.
• Some lines are easy! You can use only one type of word. For these 
blanks, say “I need a ________.”
• In some blanks, you can use two different kinds of words. For these 
blanks, say “I need either a ________ or a ________.”
• Some lines have two blanks. For these lines, say “I need both a 
________ and a ________.” 
On a piece of paper, write down a word for each blank. Read the 
poem to your group. 
Nature
Night, so ________ and ________ (feelings and colour), ________, 
________ (size and colour) stars. 
A ________ (temperature) wind blows ________ (adverb) on my face. 
It makes me want to sing ________ (adverb) a ________, ________ 
(feelings and age) song.
­62
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Grammar in Use
I. Complete the sentences with the correct words. The first letter is given.
1. Please read a________ so that everyone can hear you.
2. There wasn’t a s________ person left in the theatre after the show. 
3. Which l________ comes last in this poem? 
4. If you eat too much chocolate, you’ll get f________.
5. Words could not e________ her feelings at that moment.
6. Jim sat up when he heard someone k________ on his door. 
II. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box.
1. You’d better think it over before you ____________.
2. The programmer ____________ a solution to the system problem yesterday. 
3. ____________ my father’s handwriting, mine is poor.
4. If anything happens to him, let the doctor know ____________. 
5. There are ____________ questions in the test. 
I. Fill in the blanks with the proper tenses of the given words.
1. Just as I ________ (leave) the house, the phone rang.
2. I ________ (do) my homework at this time yesterday.
3. The girl ________ (cry) when the policeman came.
4. Lynn ________ (watch) TV while her mum was cooking.
5. They ________ (play) computer games from 7:00 to 9:00 last night.
II. Fill in the blanks with the modal verbs “must” or “can’t”. 
1. Jane doesn’t look well today. She ________ be ill.
2. You ________ be feeling tired after that long walk.
3. Danny ________ be playing on the playground. I saw him in the library just now.
4. The textbook ________ be yours. It has Li Tao’s name on it.
compared with     at once     come up with   
a set number of     make one’s decision
­63
Listening and Speaking
I. Listen to the passage and tick the correct answers.
1. The passage is about writing ________.
    
 a story	
	
 a poem	
	
 a character
2. Each story needs ________. 
    
 a thing	
	
 an animal	 	
 a main character
3. Every story needs to take place somewhere. This is called the ________ of the story.
    
 character	
	
 setting	
	
 question 
II. Work in pairs. Think about an unforgettable experience in your life and talk 
about it with your partner.
• Introduction: Introduce the story by saying what kind of story it is.
• Beginning: How does the story start?
• Main Body: Describe the main events to your partner.
• The End: How does the story end?
• Moral: Make some final comments or moral conclusions about the story.
Putting It All Together
Read the passage and answer the questions.
Return the Complete Jade to Zhao
During the Warring States Period, the King of Zhao got the invaluable jade 
of Bian He. When the King of Qin learned about it, he offered Zhao fifteen 
cities for the jade. The King of Zhao feared that they might get nothing in 
return, yet if he refused, that Qin might attack Zhao. Lin Xiangru, who was 
frank, brave, and intelligent, was sent to Qin with the jade.
The King of Qin was pleased when he saw the jade but he did not mention 
the cities. Lin said, “Your Majesty, there is a tiny flaw on the jade. Could I show 
it to you?” After he was handed the jade, Lin 
stepped backward. With his back to a pillar, he 
said, “You have no intention of giving us those 
cities, so I’ve taken back the jade. If you use 
force against me, I’ll smash my head and the jade 
against this pillar.”
To save the jade, the King of Qin apologized, 
and then showed Lin the cities on the map. But 
Lin would not believe him anymore. He ordered 
­64
I. Enjoying Literature
With poems, you need to think about  
the format, rhyme and meaning.              
                                                                                                
                                                                                       
I can write a simple poem in English 
and enjoy different kinds of stories.
II. Past Continuous Tense
Birds were flying about and singing.     
                                                                                                   
                                                                                       
Let’s write a poem. Let us try.
What do we see when we look up high?
White clouds and a clear blue sky,
One little bird that’s flying by.
Is a poem like a song?
Can it be short? Can it be long?
Yes, a poem is like a song.
It can be short. It can be long.
Let’s Write a Poem
1. Why did Lin order his man to secretly take the jade back to Zhao?
2. What do you think of Lin Xiangru?
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
I can use the past continuous tense 
correctly.
III. Modal Verb: must
He thought it must be the king’s                
musicians passing by.                             
                                                                                                  
                                                                                       
I know how to use “must” properly.
Writing a poem can be fun.
Share your poem with everyone.
Fish and dish, cat and bat,
Wish and swish, mat and hat,
Sad and bad, cat and flat,
These words rhyme — how about that?
Writing a poem can be fun.
Share your poem with everyone.
his man to secretly take the jade back to Zhao. He himself would stay there 
and face the King of Qin. Although the King of Qin was furious, he had no 
better choice but to set Lin free. Lin Xiangru returned to Zhao safely.
­65
Lessons 25 ~ 30
Look into Science
Functions
 Talking about Science
Grammar
 Attributive Clause
Structures
 That’s called the scientific method.
 Well, it’s worth a try, even if I don’t find a planet.
 In general, a blueprint is a drawing that shows how 
  to put a house together with many different parts.
 Scientific discoveries are making our lives better 
   and better.
UNIT
5
We Will Learn
­66
• What kinds of experiments have you done in science class? 
• If you hold a jar that is filled with water upside down, what will   
   happen? 
Lesson 25: Let’s Do an Experiment!
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Danny, Jenny and Brian are in the 
lab.
Brian: Let’s do an experiment. I fill a 
jar with water. I cover the top with a 
piece of cardboard and hold it there. 
Then I turn the jar upside down and 
take my hand off the cardboard. 
Can you guess what will happen? 
Danny: I think the floor will get wet. 
We should do this experiment 
outside, Brian. 
Jenny: I think the cardboard will hold 
the water. 
Danny: I don’t think so. 
Jenny: You think the water will pour 
out, Danny. I think the water will 
stay in the jar. Let’s test which 
theory is correct. 
Brian: Good idea, Jenny. That’s called 
the scientific method. 
Jenny: I am so sure of my theory that 
Brian can do the experiment over 
your head and I know you won’t 
get wet. 
Danny: Well, let’s try it!  
Brian: Are you ready, Danny?
Danny: No! Wait! (He puts on a 
raincoat and sits down.) Now I 
think I’m ready.
Jenny: Brian, take your hand off the 
cardboard. 
Danny: No! 
(Danny closes his eyes tightly, and 
Brian takes his hand off the cardboard. 
The water stays in the jar.)
Jenny: See, Danny!
Danny: How is that possible? 
Brian: The force of the air keeps the 
water in the jar. It is strong enough to 
hold the water.
Danny: Wow! 
Brian: So what have we discovered? 
Jenny: We have discovered that the air 
pressure helps the cardboard hold the 
water in the jar. 
Brian: Right. What do you conclude, 
Danny?
Danny: I conclude that air is stronger 
than I thought.
­67
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Where does Danny think they should do the experiment? 
2. What keeps the water in the jar? 
3. Is Jenny sure of her theory? How do you know? 
4. Why does Danny put on his raincoat?
5. What does Danny conclude?
Read the experiment. Put the sentences in the correct order.
2
 Put a piece of cardboard over the jar.
 The jar of water is upside down, but the water stays in the jar. This is because 
air pressure pushes the cardboard onto the jar.
Try to do the experiment in this lesson yourself.
3
Task tips: What happens when you use less water, more water, wet cardboard, 
or different kinds and sizes of jars?
What is science?
Can you explain?
Please make it easy for my brain.
It’s about making observations.
Why do onions make me cry?
Why do clouds go by?
What keeps the birds in the sky?
That’s just science.
Listen and sing along.
4
It’s about matter — the universe.
Why does a car stay on the road?
Why is there green all over a toad?
Why can’t I carry a heavy load?
That’s just science.
What Is Science?
 Fill the glass jar with water.
 Turn the glass jar over quickly. Hold your hand on the  
cardboard for a few seconds.
 Remove your hand from underneath the jar. What 
happens?
 There is more air outside the jar than inside, so there is  
more air pressure outside than inside.
­68
• Do you like doing science experiments? Why or why not?
• What will happen if you put a jar upside down over a burning candle? 
Lesson 26: Keep the Candle Burning
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
What do you need?
• a candle
• a candle holder
• a big glass jar
• a shallow dish 
• some water
• a lighter or matches 
What do you do?
1. Put the candle in the candle holder.
2. Put the candle holder on the dish.
3. Fill the dish half full with water.
4. Light the candle.
5. Let the candle burn for two or three minutes.
Science is so interesting! 
I’m sure you’ll like this 
experiment!
Can you do this 
experiment?
6. Carefully put the jar over the candle until the top of the jar rests on the dish.
7. Examine the water in the jar. What can you see? 
What is happening?
As the candle burns, it uses the oxygen in the air. When the candle stops 
burning, it has used up all the oxygen 
in the air. The water inside the jar rises. 
How far does the water rise? Because 
about one fifth of the air is made up of 
oxygen, the water rises and fills about 
one fifth of the jar.
Can you see the candle holder in 
this picture? The candle is pink. The 
candle holder is grey. The candle 
holder is “holding” the candle!
­69
Read the lesson and fill in the blanks.
1
Let’s Do It!
Let’s do the experiment together! Put the candle in the candle holder. Put the 
candle holder on the dish. Fill the dish half full with water. Light the candle with 
a ________ or a lighter. What can you see? The candle is burning. ________ 
the candle burn for two or three minutes. Then carefully put the jar over it until 
the top of the jar rests on the dish. As the candle 
burns, it ________ the oxygen in the air. When 
the candle stops ________, it has used up all 
the oxygen in the air. The water inside the jar 
________ and fills about ________ of the jar. 
This is because about one fifth of the air is 
made up of oxygen. 
Circle the correct words to complete the sentences.
2
1. Don’t (use up/push up) all of the ink. Leave some for me.
2. The medical team (is made of/is made up of) five experienced doctors.  
3. Please fill the hole (with/in) sand and water.
4. They didn’t realize their mistake (until/as) we told them. 
5. My brother wasn’t (strong enough/enough strong) to lift the box.
SCIENCE? THAT’S INTERESTING!
Read about the experiment in this 
lesson. With a group of classmates, 
practice the experiment. Do your 
experiment in front of the class. Don’t 
forget the following things:
• First, describe your experiment.
• Second, ask the class what they 
think will happen.
• Third, do the experiment. 
• Finally, ask the class if the result 
is what they expected.
PROJECT
­70
• Do you know any of the planets in the solar system?
• What would you like to look at with a telescope? 
Lesson 27: Planet Danny
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
It’s Saturday afternoon. Jenny and 
Brian go to visit Danny. When they 
arrive, Danny is outside in the yard.
Brian: Hi Danny. What do you have 
there?
Danny: It’s a telescope. I told my 
father that we were studying the 
solar system. He said that I could 
use his telescope. (He looks through 
the telescope.) That’s funny! I can 
see only a tiny circle of light.
Jenny: (She laughs.) You’re looking 
through the wrong end, Danny! Try 
looking through the other end.
(Danny turns the telescope around 
and looks through it again.) 
Danny: That’s better! But I still can’t 
see any stars or planets.
Brian: You certainly can’t, Danny! 
The sun is shining. The stars come 
out at night.
Jenny: The sunset today is around 7:00 
p.m. Maybe Brian and I can join you 
after supper. I would love to look 
through your telescope.
Dig In
The earth, the sun and the moon all belong to the solar system. Our 
solar system is in a galaxy called the Milky Way. The Milky Way has more 
than five hundred billion stars. Scientists say the universe contains billions 
of galaxies. Do you think there is life on other planets?
Danny: Great. You two can help me.
Brian: Help you? What are you trying 
to do?
Danny: I want to discover a new planet. 
Brian: I don’t think you can find one 
unless you have a bigger telescope. 
Scientists use huge telescopes when 
they look for planets.
Danny: Bigger than mine? 
Jenny: Bigger than your whole house! 
Actually, double the size of your house!
Danny: Well, it’s worth a try, even if I 
don’t find a planet. 
Brian: We can try tonight. The universe 
is a mystery. Maybe we’ll find other 
amazing things!
­71
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Danny is studying the solar system at school.		
	
	
(      )
2. Danny is looking through the telescope when Jenny and Brian
    come to visit.	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
(      )
3. During the day, Danny can see many stars in the sky through 
    the telescope.	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
(      )
4. Jenny and Brian will join Danny after supper.		
	
	
(      )
5. Danny has discovered a new planet.	
	
	
	
	
(      )
Listen to the dialogue and tick the correct answers.
2
1. What did Danny do last night?
    
 He tried to study the moon.	 	
 He tried to find a new planet. 
2. What did Danny use?
    
 A telescope.         	
	
	
 A book.   
3. What did Danny need?
    
 More sleep.        	
	
	
 More stars.
Read the lesson and fill in the blanks.
3
On Saturday afternoon, Brian and Jenny visited Danny at his house. When 
they arrived, Danny was outside looking ________ a telescope. Brian and 
Jenny laughed at Danny because he was using the wrong ________ of the 
telescope. Of course, Danny couldn’t see the ________ during the day. Brian 
and Jenny also wanted to join Danny. They decided to come back after supper. 
After the sun went down, they could see the stars. Danny hoped to ________ a 
new planet. 
What interests you about the solar system? If you had a chance to 
go to space, would you go? Share your ideas with a partner.
4
­72
• Would you like to be a biologist when you grow up? Why or why not? 
• What mysteries of nature do you know about? 
Lesson 28: The Study of Living Things
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dr. Chip Taylor teaches biology 
at a university in the United States. 
He studies one kind of North 
American butterfly. Just like a 
migrating bird, this butterfly travels 
about 4 000 kilometres south in fall. 
Fantastic facts about the butterfly 
have been drawing Dr. Taylor’s 
attention.
In Mexico, the butterflies always 
return to the same small piece of 
forest, which is only 20 kilometres 
Butterflies are beautiful. What do you know 
about them?
wide. Here, as many as 230 million butterflies spend the winter. They can cover 
some trees almost completely. The butterflies that return to the south are the 
great-great grandchildren of the butterflies that left for the north. When they begin 
to travel north in spring, the females lay eggs. They lay eggs on only one plant: 
milkweed.
But in Mexico, people cut down the trees that the butterflies need to rest on 
because they want more land for farming. In the United States and Canada, 
farmers use chemicals that kill milkweed. This worries Dr. Taylor a lot. 
Now things are improving. Mexico has begun to protect parts of its forests. The 
United States and Canada have encouraged farmers to use fewer chemicals.
Scientists still don’t understand how the butterflies know when to fly south. 
If they are even a few days late, they will freeze. And how do all the great-great 
grandchildren find the same forest in Mexico every year? This is both puzzling 
and interesting for many scientists. 
There are many mysteries yet to be discovered by those interested in science. 
Would you like to study biology?
­73
Read the lesson and complete the table.
1
Let’s Do It!
Join the sentences to make attributive clauses. 
2
Fantastic 
facts about 
butterflies 
• The butterflies always ________ to the same small piece 
  of forest and ________ the winter there.
• The butterflies that return to the south are the great-great   
  grandchildren of the butterflies that left for the north. 
• The females ________ eggs on only one plant: milkweed.
Things that Dr. 
Taylor worries 
about
• In Mexico, people cut down the trees that the butterflies 
  need to ________ on.
• In the U.S. and Canada, farmers use chemicals that 
  ________ milkweed.
Things that 
scientists can’t 
understand
• How do the butterflies know when to fly south?
• How do the great-great grandchildren of the butterflies    
  ________ the same forest?
Example: 
We did some experiments yesterday. The experiments were fantastic. 
The experiments that we did yesterday were fantastic. 
1. I asked him to mail the letter. I wrote the letter to my cousin. 
    _____________________________________________________________
2. Yesterday I met a boy. The boy is a new member in our art club. 
    _____________________________________________________________
3. Mary was carrying a bag. The bag cost her a lot of money.
    _____________________________________________________________   
4. Football is a team sport. Football is popular all over the world.
    _____________________________________________________________ 
Work in groups of three to play a game.
3
Mr. Brown
who is a biologist
will give us a talk
Task tips: Each group should prepare some pieces of paper and divide them 
into three columns. Student A writes a person’s name in the first column, folds 
the paper and passes it to Student B. Student B writes a statement beginning 
with “who”, folds the paper and passes it to Student C. Student C must finish 
the sentence and read it out loud.
Example: 
­74
• What do you know about DNA? 
• What can scientists do with DNA?
Lesson 29: DNA — The Story of You
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
When you build a house, you use a blueprint. 
What’s a blueprint? In general, a blueprint is a 
drawing that shows how to put a house together 
with many different parts. DNA is the blueprint 
of life.
But building a living thing is far more 
complex than building a house. It takes millions 
of years for nature to change the DNA in living 
things to make them fit the world they live in.
This is the shape of DNA. Do you 
think it’s magic?
How tall are you? What colour are your eyes? What size are your feet? All 
these things are strongly influenced by your DNA before you are born!
DNA is fantastic!
• Except for some twins, every living thing has its own unique DNA.
• Some health problems can be caused by problems in your DNA. Scientists 
can look for these problems and, sometimes, help you before you become sick. In 
the future, scientists might be able to change your DNA.
• There are copies of your DNA in every part of your body. For example, your 
finger has the same DNA as your hair. 
• You have your own unique DNA, but 
it repeats patterns from your parents’ DNA. 
From your DNA, scientists can identify not 
only you, but also people who are related 
to you. Your parents and grandparents are 
related to you, and you have their DNA. 
When you have a grandson or granddaughter, 
he or she will have your DNA. 
Your DNA comes from your parents.
Your DNA has billions of instructions that explain why you are the way you 
are. It’s one of the most amazing things on the earth!
­75
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
Let’s Do It!
1. What is a blueprint? 
2. Which is more complex, building a living thing or building a house?
3. Do some twins have the same DNA?
4. Is it possible to change your DNA?
5. Whose DNA is related to yours? 
Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box. 
2
1. Your homework is quite good ____________ a few spelling mistakes.
2. ____________ the young ____________ the old like pop music.
3. Kate’s hair is ____________ colour ____________ her sister’s.
4. ____________, women live longer than men.
5. ____________ many difficulties remain, we can overcome them.
6. Is wealth ____________ happiness? 
Is it a good idea to change the DNA of the food we eat? Some 
people say doing this makes our food better. Others think it’s too 
dangerous. Search the Internet for information and write down your 
ideas.
4
in general     except for     not only… but also    
related to     even if     the same… as
Complete the passage with the sentences in the box.
3
Changing DNA
Do you know DNA can be changed? Have you ever seen a pig with a dog’s 
body? Of course not! Pigs and dogs can’t have babies together. ________ But 
now, scientists can do it. Scientists can take DNA from one kind of animal and 
put it into another kind of animal. They can design new plants by combining 
the DNA of other plants. ________ Some scientists are worried. They say we 
need to know more about DNA before we start changing it. ________ But what 
if the plants are bad for humans, too?
A. Their DNA can’t combine. 
B. We can make plants that are bad for pests.
C. They can even combine the DNA of a plant and an animal.
­76
• Have you ever done any interesting experiments? Can you 
   describe one of them? 
• What would life be like without computers or mobile phones?
Lesson 30: Science Affects Us
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Jenny,
I’m very well. Thanks! The experiment you did sounds 
interesting. 
Yes, science is interesting, and it affects our everyday lives. Our lives would 
surely be very different without scientific developments. I always wonder what 
life would be like without computers or mobile phones. Scientific discoveries 
are making our lives better and better. 
This week we had some science lessons, too. I enjoyed learning about DNA. It’s 
really one of the most amazing things on the earth! Scientists are doing so many 
new things with DNA. I think it will change the world. It will be interesting to 
see what happens.
Wang Mei 
Hi Wang Mei, 
How are you? Everyone here is fine. 
Do you want to surprise your friends? Brian, Danny and I did an experiment 
in science class this week. I suggest you try it, too! First, get a jar full of water 
and a piece of cardboard. Cover the jar with the cardboard and turn the jar over. 
Next, take your hand off. Can you guess what happens? The cardboard holds the 
water in the jar! The air pressure pushing up on the cardboard is higher than that 
of the water pushing down from inside the jar. The higher air pressure outside 
the jar holds the cardboard in place.
Science is interesting. Don’t you think so?
Jenny
­77
Read the lesson and fill in the blanks. 
1
Let’s Do It!
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
2
Here are some inventions. How do they affect our everyday lives? 
Talk about them with your partner.
3
Science affects people’s ________ lives. Without the scientific developments 
of recent years, our lives would be very different. Can you imagine life without 
computers or ________? Scientific ________ are making our lives better and 
better. DNA is really one of the most amazing things on the earth. Many people 
think it will ________ the world.
TV      camera      radio      computer      telephone      
 light bulb      clock    washing machine      compass     
                    telescope      X-ray      eyeglasses
1. Jenny ________ they use a stronger piece of cardboard for the experiment.
2. The air pressure ________ the result of the experiment.
3. The experiment led to a wonderful ________.
4. What are your plans for the ________ of your company? 
5. They used a rock to hold the map in ________.
 discover      affect      suggest      place      develop
Example:
Without TV
I would spend more time talking with 
my family.
With TV
I watch TV to get information.
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
­78
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box. 
1. The teacher asked the students to circle the ________ answers. 
2. I think it is a new ________ of solving the problem.
3. The metal is not a new ________ — people have known about it for years.
4. He didn’t know what could hit him with such ________.
5. Retelling her experiences is part of her ________ life.
6. It has the ________ advantages of being both easy and cheap.
7. You can never play well ________ you practice more.
8. She kept ________ the words over and over again.
force      method      correct      unless      discovery
repeat      double      everyday
Grammar in Use
I. Circle the correct relative pronouns.
1. Have you ever spoken to the people (who/which) live next door? 
2. Here is the book (who/that) you were looking for. 
3. There is a program on TV (that/what) you might like. 
4. What is the name of that woman (who/whom) just came in? 
5. The girl to (who/whom) the teacher is talking is my younger sister. 
6. Here are the pens (which/who) I bought yesterday. 
II. Combine the sentences to make attributive clauses. 
1. I have a friend. My friend enjoys listening to music. 
    ______________________________________________________________
2. This is the boy. The boy won the singing competition. 
    ______________________________________________________________ 
3. The book is very interesting. Li Ming lent me the book. 
    ______________________________________________________________ 
4. Brian gave me a bag. The bag was full of books. 
    ______________________________________________________________ 
5. I’ll show you around the park. I like the park best.
   _______________________________________________________________ 
­79
I. Listen to the passage and put the sentences in the correct order.
 Students also learn the right scientific attitude — a respect for truth. 
 They do experiments in the lab. 
 Later, they discuss problems with their teachers and classmates.  
 In science classes, students learn about scientific research and methods. 
 How do students learn science in school? 
 They study theories and methods in textbooks. 
 Science classes are important for high school students. 
II. How does science affect our everyday lives? Talk about it with a partner.
Putting It All Together
The BeiDou Navigation Satellite System
The BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS) started its full-scale 
work on July 31, 2020. As the world’s fourth navigation satellite system, 
the BDS was independently constructed and operated by China. 
BeiDou means “Big Dipper” in Chinese. In old days, people looked up 
at the Big Dipper for direction when they got lost. Now, the BDS is there 
to keep us safe and bring us convenience. It provides all-time, all-weather 
and high-accuracy positioning, navigation and timing services to global 
users.
China applies the principle that “the BDS is developed by China, and 
dedicated to the world” to actively share BDS achievements. The related 
products, technologies, and services have been applied in more than half of 
countries around the world. 
As the BDS joins hands with other navigation satellite systems, China 
will work with all other countries, regions, and international organizations 
to promote global satellite navigation development and make the BDS 
better serve the world and benefit humanity.
Read the passage and answer the questions.
Listening and Speaking
1. What’s the principle China applies for the BDS achievements?
2. What else do you know about the BDS? You can search the Internet for more 
information.
­80
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
I. Talking about Science 
Scientific discoveries are making           
our lives better and better.                    
                                                          
                                                          
I know how to express thoughts about 
science in English.
Inventions and discoveries
Have changed the modern world.
Developing technologies
Have changed the modern world.
I will turn on the light,
Thanks to electricity.
I will turn on the light,
Thanks to electricity.
Inventions and discoveries
Have changed the modern world.
Developing technologies
Have changed the modern world.
I will phone one of my friends,
Thanks to technology.
I will phone one of my friends,
Thanks to technology.
Thanks to Technology
II. Attributive Clause
The butterflies that return to the south 
are the great-great grandchildren of      
the butterflies that left for the north.         
                                                             
                                                             
I can use attributive clauses properly.
Inventions and discoveries
Have changed the modern world.
Developing technologies
Have changed the modern world.
I will shoot you with my camera,
Thanks to technology.
I will shoot you with my camera,
Thanks to technology.
 
­81
 
Lessons 31 ~ 36
Movies and Theatre 
Functions
 Talking about Entertainment
Grammar
 Object Complements
 Passive Voice
Structures
 What do you think is needed to make a movie or 
   a play?
 Thousands of people can be involved in making 
   a movie.
 Some research was done in order to make the play.
 Their movie made the whole class laugh.
UNIT
6
We Will Learn
­82
• Have you ever been in a theatre? What did you watch?
• What do you know about making movies?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Lesson 31: A Movie or a Play
Ms. Cox always tries to find interesting information and 
projects for her class to work on. She believes that students 
learn best when they are interested in a topic. 
Learning Tip
Theatre is a form of art that presents a story to a live audience in a specific 
place. The performers may communicate with the audience through gesture, 
speech, song, music or dance.
Ms. Cox: Yes, those 
are all important. 
What else is 
needed?  
Brian: We need someone to take care 
of costumes, sound and music. 
Ms. Cox: Very good! Maybe we can 
do some research first. To do good 
research, you need to ask good 
questions. Here are a few: What are 
some different kinds of movies and 
plays? Have movies always been 
made in the same way?
Danny: Hmmm… I have no 
background in movie making! I 
don’t know the answer to any of 
those questions. 
Ms. Cox: Don’t worry, Danny. That’s 
what group work is for! OK, class. 
Let’s get to work in groups. Do some 
research, decide what you will make, 
then divide up the tasks.
Ms. Cox: Today let’s talk about 
movies and plays. Have you ever 
seen a movie or a play in a theatre?
(Most students raise their hands.)
Ms. Cox: Most of you have seen 
movies or plays in a theatre, but 
have you ever been involved in 
making a movie or a play? 
(A few students raise their hands.)
Ms. Cox: Some of you have. Great! 
Do you want to make one in class?
Students: (They are all excited.) Yes!
Ms. Cox: Excellent! What do you 
think is needed to make a movie or 
a play?
Jenny: A good script needs to be 
written.
Danny: Good actors… 
Steven: A good director to direct the 
movie… 
­83
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Most of the students in Ms. Cox’s class have been to a theatre before.    (      ) 
2. Ms. Cox thinks making a short movie or a play will interest the students. 
                                                                                                                       (      ) 
3. We have to take care of lots of things when making a movie or a play.    (      ) 
4. Actors are the people who direct movies. 	
	
	
	
         (      ) 
5. Some background research is necessary before making a movie.  	         (      )
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the given words.
2
1. Do you know that ________? She ________ many songs in the past. 
    (sing/singer)
2. Our English ________ also ________ us Chinese in our school.
    (teach/teacher)
3. ________ should be careful when they ________ in the dark. (drive/driver)
4. James Cameron, a famous ________, ________ Avatar. (direct/director)
5. The director tells the ________ what to do and how to ________ in the 
movie. (act/actor)
HAVE A FILM AND THEATRE FESTIVAL
Divide your class into big groups. Throughout this unit, you will work with the 
same group to make a movie or a play for this special film and theatre festival. 
As a group, choose a topic and brainstorm the main plot.
Decide what each student in the group will do. You will need:
• One or two students to write the script.
• One student to be the director.
• One student to be the camera person 
(only if you’re making a movie). 
• One student for costumes.
• One or two to take care of sound and 
music. 
• Three or more actors and actresses. 
Make the movie or play and have fun!
Present your movie or play and have a classroom awards show like the 
Oscars.
PROJECT
­84
• What movies have you seen? Name some.
• What kind of movies do you like to watch? Why?
Lesson 32: Moving Pictures 
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Jenny, Brian and Danny are outside 
the library. They have just finished 
doing some research.
Danny: It’s hard to believe movies are 
just over 100 years old.
Jenny: Yes. But like the Internet or 
other similar technologies, movies 
have had such a big effect on us. 
Brian: I love watching movies. A 
movie is really an amazing piece of 
art and technology. I just found out 
the very first movies were made in 
France and Germany. 
Jenny: That’s true. When movies 
were first created, they were not 
in colour. They were just moving 
pictures. Do you know that for 
those first movies, only a couple 
of people would act in front of the 
camera? 
Danny: Wow, that’s interesting! Movie 
making is so complex these days. 
Thousands of people can be involved 
in making a movie. And some 
movies, like Titanic, can take years 
to make and cost a lot of money.
Learning Tip
There are many types of movies: comedy, horror (scary), action, 
cartoon, suspense (thriller), fantasy, documentary, romance, science fiction, 
mystery, disaster, war, musical and more.
Jenny: Do you like Titanic, Danny?
Danny: No. I like action movies. I love 
Bruce Lee and kung fu movies. I hope 
to learn kung fu someday.
Jenny: I prefer science fiction. I learn a 
lot of interesting things from science 
fiction movies. What about you, Brian?
Brian: I like comedies. I especially like 
Charlie Chaplin’s movies. He was a 
great actor. Comedies make people 
laugh and feel happy. I also like 
cartoons.
Danny: Watching a great movie while 
eating popcorn is a wonderful thing. 
I haven’t watched a movie for a long 
time. I hear Kung Fu Dinosaur III 
is on. Why not go and see it this 
weekend?
­85
Read and tick the kinds of movies that are mentioned in the lesson.
1
Let’s Do It!
 action    	 	
 science fiction       	
 comedy    		
 war
 horror    	 	
 documentary         	
 musical      	
 cartoon 
Read the lesson again and answer the questions.
2
1. How long is the history of movie making? 
2. Where were the first movies made? 
3. What were the first movies like?
4. How are movies today different from movies in the past?
What are their favourite types of movies? Listen to the dialogue 
and fill in the table.
3
Name
Wang Mei
Li Ming
Yang Hao 
Li Lin
Favourite 
movie type
4
Example: 
I really like the movie Titanic. The director, James Cameron, made it in the 
year… I like Jack and Rose in the movie. A famous line in the movie is...
Choose one of your favourite movies and write a movie review for it.
5
Do you know the types of the following movies? You can search 
the Internet for help.
The Wandering Earth 
Kung Fu Panda
Farewell Atlantis (2012)
The Battle at Lake Changjin 
The Lion King 
Titanic
The Sound of Music 
Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon 
­86
Lesson 33: The Fisherman and the Goldfish ( I )
T
H
I
N
K
A
B
O
U
T
I
T
Director: Brian 
Script: Steven, Jenny and Kim
Characters: Fisherman — Danny, Fisherman’s Wife — Jenny, Goldfish — Kim
Sound & Set: Brian, Kate and Danny
Costumes: Kate and Steven 
Scene 1: On the Sea
(A fisherman wearing a hat is 
fishing on the sea. Waves can be heard 
in the background.)
Fisherman: I am a fisherman. My 
wife and I lead a poor life. 
(He pulls out his net and opens it 
up. A goldfish jumps out of the net.)
Fisherman: Oh, a goldfish!
Goldfish: Dear Mr. Fisherman, please 
let me go. I will give you whatever 
you want.
Fisherman: Oh my goodness! A talking 
fish! Please go back to your family. I 
don’t want anything.
(The goldfish swims back into the 
sea.)
 Scene 2: A Poor House 
(The fisherman’s wife, who has grey 
hair and old, dirty clothing, is sitting at 
the table. The fisherman walks in.)
Fisherman: Can you believe it? 
    I caught a talking goldfish today.  
Wife: Really? What did it say?
Fisherman: It asked me to let it go. 
It said it could give me whatever I 
wished for.
Wife: What did you ask for?
Fisherman: I asked for nothing and let 
it go. 
Wife: How did I marry such a fool! Why 
didn’t you ask it for a new house? 
Ours is so old.
Fisherman: Don’t be angry, dear. I will 
ask for a house.
• Have you ever acted in a class or school play?
• Have you read the story                                                 ?
The Fisherman and the Goldfish
­87
Read the lesson and number the sentences in the correct order.
1
Let’s Do It!
 The fisherman told his wife about catching a goldfish. 
 A poor fisherman with a hat went out fishing. 
 The wife wanted the fisherman to ask for a new house. 
 The fisherman let the talking fish go. 
 The fisherman caught a talking fish.
Complete the dialogue with the words or phrases in the box.
2
whatever      wish for      open… up      jump
A: This is a magic box. You can find ____________ you want in it.
B: Really? Can I ____________ it ____________ now?
A: Sure. What do you ____________?
B: I wish a little dog would ____________ out of the box.
A: No problem. Wait and see! It’s time to witness a miracle.
Choose a play and make a big poster for it. Try to make the poster 
attractive. Here is an example.
3
A Dancing Dinosaur
Director: Jenny
Characters: Dancing Dinosaur — Danny,  
                        Dancing Coach — Brian
Sound & Set: Steven
Main Plot: This is a story about a dinosaur who became 
a dancer. It tells about his journey from an ordinary 
dinosaur to a famous dancer and all the challenges he 
had to overcome along the way. 
Come and see Danny’s very first dance performance!
­88
• Which characters in the play do you like? Which do you dislike? 
• What happened in the last lesson? Can you guess what will happen 
in this lesson?
Lesson 34: The Fisherman and the Goldfish ( II )
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Scene 3: On the Sea
(The fisherman is standing on the 
coast, looking out towards the sea. 
Waves can be heard.)
Fisherman: Goldfish, are you there?
Goldfish: (It jumps out.) Yes, Mr. 
Fisherman. What can I do for you?
Fisherman: Could I have a new 
house? My wife really wants one.
Goldfish: No problem. You will have 
a new house very soon.
Scene 4: A New House 
(The wife is looking around the new 
house. The fisherman enters.)
Wife: How stupid you are! Look at 
me! I have no good clothes and 
no beautiful handbags. Go back at 
once! I want to be a rich lady!
Fisherman: Don’t be angry, my dear. 
I will go back and ask for that.
(The lights go off. Waves can be 
heard.)
Fisherman: Goldfish! Are you there?
Goldfish: Yes. What else can I do for 
you, Mr. Fisherman?
Fisherman: Could you please make my 
wife a rich lady? 
Goldfish: OK.
(The lights come back on. The wife 
is wearing beautiful new clothes and 
sitting among servants and guards.)
Wife: Go and see that goldfish at once! 
I want to be Queen of the Sea and all 
the fish should serve me!
Fisherman: You are mad! It’s too much.
Wife: You are old and stupid! Go right 
now, or I will punish you! 
Scene 5: On the Sea
 (The lights go off. Strong waves can 
be heard.)
Fisherman: Goldfish! Are you there?
Goldfish: Yes, Mr. Fisherman. 
Fisherman: I am sorry, but could you 
make my wife Queen of the Sea? She 
also wants all the fish to serve her. 
(There is no reply — only the sound 
of the waves crashing on the coast. 
The lights go on. The fisherman’s wife 
is back in the old house wearing poor 
clothes again.)
­89
Read the lesson and tick the correct answers. 
1
Let’s Do It!
1. What does the wife not ask for? 
    
 To be rich.       	 
 To be a queen.        	
 To be a beautiful lady. 
2. What happens in the end when the wife keeps asking for more things? 
    
 She gets everything she wants. 
    
 The fisherman leaves her.         
    
 Everything is taken away.  
3. How many times does the fisherman go to see the goldfish? 
    
 Once.         	
 
 Twice.        	
	
 Three times.
Fill in the blanks with correct prepositions or adverbs.
2
1. A man is running ________ us! What’s happening? 
2. All the lights in the building go ________ after 11:00 p.m. 
3. The lights came back ________ when the actor went on stage. 
4. A: Where is your grandfather? 
    B: Look! He’s working ________ the trees. 
5. A: What can you hear ________ the background? 
    B: The sound ________ waves.
Complete the passage with the correct forms of the words in the 
box.
3
queen       among       mad       guard       enter       serve
________ all the types of movies, I like fantasies best. Recently I saw a 
movie called The Chronicles of Narnia, which is based on a series of novels. 
There are four children in the movie. By chance, they ________ a fantastic 
world called Narnia. There, they meet the White Witch, who has a lot of 
________ and servants. She tries to control Narnia and orders people to 
________ and obey her. She is ________ at the children and wants to kill 
them. In the end, the four brave children beat the White Witch and succeed in 
protecting Narnia. They also become the kings and the ________ of Narnia.
Work in groups and act out a play. You can act out The Fisherman 
and the Goldfish or any other play you like.
4
­90
• Can you name some famous playwrights? Who are they? 
•  What kinds of plays do you like? Why?
Lesson 35: Theatres Are Fun!
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
It’s Saturday evening. Li Ming is talking to Jenny and Danny online.
Li Ming: Guess what? I saw a big poster for the new Kung Fu Dinosaur movie 
on my way home. Kung Fu Dinosaur really looks like Danny.
Jenny: Did you know that Danny is a good actor, Li Ming? We performed a play 
in class. It was so much fun!
Li Ming: Really? What play did you perform? 
Danny: The Fisherman and the Goldfish. I played the poor but handsome 
fisherman, and Jenny was the fisherman’s wife. I will send you the photos we 
took in class later.
Li Ming: Please do! I can’t wait to see them.  
Jenny: Everyone in our group did a good job. Some research was done in order 
to make the play. We learned about some good plays and famous playwrights! 
Li Ming: I know William Shakespeare is a great playwright. I watched his 
Hamlet last year.
Jenny: Yes, many famous works in English were written by him.
Li Ming: Are his works all tragedies? I prefer comedies.
Jenny: Actually, his early plays were mainly comedies and historical pieces. But 
most of his famous works are tragedies. They are well known around the world. 
Li Ming: We have some excellent playwrights and famous plays in China. Cao 
Yu’s Thunderstorm and Lao She’s Teahouse have been on stage for many years 
— and still are today.
Danny: Interesting! I would love to go to the teahouse one day.
Jenny: I guess Teahouse is a play, not a place.
Li Ming: You are right, Jenny. But we do have a Lao She Teahouse in Beijing. 
People can have tea and watch plays or operas there. 
Jenny: What a wonderful theatre! People can enjoy tea and plays at the same time. 
Danny: Great! I hope to go to the Teahouse and watch Teahouse.
­91
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. William Shakespeare is a world-famous playwright.  	
	
(      ) 
2. Shakespeare’s works are all comedies and historical pieces.           	(      ) 
3. Hamlet is a famous comedy.                              	
	
	
(      )
4. Teahouse was written by Lao She.                         	
	
	
(      )
5. Cao Yu wrote the play Thunderstorm.                 	
	
	
(      )
6. In Lao She Teahouse Theatre, you can drink tea while enjoying 
    a play.	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
(      )
Choose one of the above plays and complete the table.
3
Play
Hamlet
Playwright
Type of play
One of the main characters
Famous line
To be, or not to be — that is the question.
Match each play with its playwright. You can search the Internet for 
help.
2
Use the table above and write a short passage about your 
favourite play or playwright.
4
  Cao Yu
  Lao She
  William Shakespeare
  Romeo and Juliet
  Hamlet
  Sunrise
  Longxu Slum
  Teahouse
  Thunderstorm
  Camel Xiangzi
Example:
­92
• Who’s your favourite actor or actress?
• Can you name some people who work behind the scenes on movies
   and plays?
Lesson 36: Making Plays Is Fun
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Today we finished our two-week study of movies and plays. It was the best 
two weeks, and we learned a lot.
When we began these lessons, all I knew was that movies and plays are fun 
to watch. Like most people, I always focused on the actors or actresses. I 
thought they were the most important people in the show. Now I know that 
this is not true. 
Actors are only a small part of a movie or a play. It can take hundreds of 
people to make a movie or put on a play. We seldom think about the people 
who work behind the scenes. But without them, making a movie or a play 
would be almost impossible. Without their hard work, we would never get to 
know so many great stories and stars! 
For the group project, some of my classmates shot short movies. They all 
did wonderful work. One group made a movie that was a comedy. Their 
movie made the whole class laugh. They are talented 
movie makers. My group performed a play called The 
Fisherman and the Goldfish. 
Ms. Cox was really happy with our projects. And 
we really enjoyed learning about movies and plays. 
Writing, creating, directing and acting in our own show 
was an experience we will never forget.
Jenny
Jenny's blog
­93
Listen to the passage and tick the correct answers.
2
Let’s Do It!
1. How long was Jack’s holiday?
    
 Three days.      	
	
	
 Two days. 
2. What did Jack do during the holiday?
    
 He watched an action movie.   	
 He watched a cartoon.
3. What did the actor and actress do in the movie?
    
 They found a new world.   	 	
 They fought some bad men.
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
1. For how long did Jenny and her classmates learn about movies and plays? 
2. Who do most people focus on when they watch movies? 
3. Did Jenny’s class like the comedy one group made? How do you know that? 
4. What was the name of the play that Jenny’s group wrote? 
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
3
active       action       activity       act       actress       actor
1. Mountain climbing and fishing are my favourite outdoor ________.
2. Audrey Hepburn was an ________, and she was very pretty.
3. He comes from a family of ________. His parents are well-known movie  
stars. 
4. We’ve ________ in many school plays.
5. Is your brother still an ________ member of the chess club?
6. People should take ________ to protect the environment.
Read Jenny’s blog and write some comments 
about it. 
4
Task tips:
You can agree or disagree with Jenny, or you can just 
add your own thoughts on the subject to the blog.
­94
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
1. I was there for only a ________ of weeks, but it felt like I was there for a month. 
2. James Cameron ________ the movies Titanic and Avatar. 
3. She is a waitress. Her job is to ________ people with food and drinks. 
4. I like all colours, so you can choose ________ you like.
5. He’ll go ________ if he is asked the same thing again and again. 
6. Romeo wanted to ________ Juliet but his parents did not agree with that.
7. Jackie Chan is my favourite actor. He has acted in many ________ movies.
II. Choose the correct phrases to complete the sentences. Use the correct forms.
1. This cake can be ________ (divide up/make up) into ten pieces. 
2. Without thinking, he ________ (jump into/jump out of) the river to save the boy.
3. These exercises ________ (look out/focus on) different points of the text.  
4. The light ________ (take off/go off) suddenly and we couldn’t see anything.
5. I’ve got ________ (a couple of/a couple) questions to ask you.
marry     couple     mad     direct     serve     action     whatever
Grammar in Use
Fill in the blanks using the passive voice.
1. A talk on Chinese culture ________ (give) in the hall next Monday.
2. ________ many orange trees ________ (plant) last year?
3. The door ________ (knock) down and people ran out. 
4. Don’t go to the party if you ________ (not invite).
5. Every person should ________ (treat) equally and fairly. 
Listening and Speaking
I. Listen to the passage and write true (T) or false (F). 
1. Charlie Chaplin wanted to work in show business when he was young.  (      )
2. Chaplin’s comedies make people laugh to tears.          	
	
	
 (      )  
3. Chaplin’s films were silent, and his actions were funny.  		
	
 (      )
4. He died in America on Christmas Day in 1977.         	
	
	
 (      )
­95
Putting It All Together
Read the passage and fill in the table.
People Behind the Scenes
Usually when a movie comes out, the actors get all the glory. But they are 
only a small part of the movie-making process. Thousands of people work 
behind the scenes to make a great movie. Without them, movies would not 
be possible. 
Director: Movie directors direct the movies. They are like the top 
managers in an office or a factory. The directors choose the actors and tell 
them how to perform their roles. They work with almost everyone in the 
movie, telling them what to do and how to do it. The directors are supposed 
to know everything that goes on in the movie, from music and costumes to 
lights and sound.
Camera operator: Camera operators are experts at using movie cameras. 
They work long hours, making sure the pictures and actors look really good 
in every scene. 
Costume designer: Costume designers are responsible for designing or 
making costumes. Sometimes costume designers have to work late into the 
night so that actors can have their clothes ready for the next day of filming.
Sound operator: Sound operators are in charge of production sound. 
They record the dialogue between the actors on the movie set. Later, in 
production, they add sound effects. They also mix music into the movie. 
They make sure every sound in the movie is produced clearly and fits in 
nicely.  
Set designer: A movie set is the place where all the action happens in a 
movie. Set designers work hard to build sets for the movie. Without them, 
movies would not look as real.
II. Work in groups. Have an awards show like the Oscars. 
Task tips: Choose one student to act as the host of the awards show. That student 
will announce and give out the awards. To decide who should get the awards, 
have a class vote. Here are some categories your class can vote on: best script, 
best director, best actor and actress, best costume design, best set design, best 
camera operator and best sound operator.
­96
Who
What they do
Director
Camera operator
Costume designer
Sound operator
Set designer
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
I.	 Talking about Entertainment
A movie is really an amazing piece of 
art and technology.                                           
______________________________
______________________________
I know how to discuss entertainment in 
English.
II. Object Complements 
She also wants all the fish to serve her.   
______________________________
______________________________
I can use object complements properly. 
III. Passive Voice 
Thousands of people can be involved 
in making a movie.                                       
______________________________
______________________________
I can use the passive voice properly.
Titanic was a great big ship
That sailed off England’s coast.
Who was to know its destiny?
That calm spring day, that calm spring day.
They built the ship Titanic
To sail the ocean blue.
It was the biggest ever,
The strongest too, the strongest too.
She Went Down
She went down, she went down,
That great ship went down.
And no one knew her destiny,
That calm spring day, that calm spring day.
Many people took a trip,
Titanic, that great ship,
Not so many finished it,
That calm spring day, that calm spring day.
­97
Lessons 37 ~ 42
Work for Peace
Functions
 Talking about Disputes and Settlements
Grammar
 Conjunctions: and, but, or, so
Structures
 I tried calling you, but your phone was out of 
   service.
 We are all friends, so we try hard to understand
   each other.
 It helps the situation, but sometimes it is not
   successful.
 Did you ever have a fight with a good friend?
UNIT
7
We Will Learn
­98
Lesson 37: Don’t Fight!
• Have you ever missed a big event like a basketball game, a concert 
or a movie? Why did you miss it?
• When there is a dispute, how do you deal with it?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
After a basketball game, Danny, 
Jenny and Brian are talking happily.
Brian: That was quite a victory, 
Danny! The other team was strong, 
but you beat them.
Danny: Thanks, Brian. It’s fun to win, 
but I just love to play. Everyone 
played so well!
Jenny: By the way, where was Steven 
today? Is there anything wrong 
with him?
(Danny is just about to say 
something when he sees Steven running 
towards them carrying a basketball.)
Steven: Danny! Why didn’t you tell 
me the game time was changed?
Danny: I did! I sent you an e-mail.
Steven: Well, my computer broke 
down the day before yesterday and 
it’s still being repaired. Why didn’t 
you call me?
Danny: I tried calling you, but your 
phone was out of service. I sent 
you a text message.
Steven: I didn’t check my messages! 
We live close to each other, so 
why didn’t you come over and 
knock at my door! You knew how 
important the game was to me! 
Now I’ve missed it!
Danny: Well, I was too busy all day, 
and I am NOT your secretary!
Steven: What?!
(Steven throws his ball on the ground. 
It bounces and hits Danny’s head.)
Danny: Ouch! Are you crazy?
(Danny almost hits Steven, but Brian 
and Jenny jump in to separate them.)
Jenny: Don’t fight, you two! You are 
good friends, not enemies. You should 
behave like gentlemen. Let’s talk!
I have nothing to 
say to a wild man!
Me neither!
­99
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
The words in italics are from this lesson. Tick the correct answers to 
complete the sentences.
2
1. He is a gentleman. He is always ________.    
     
 polite  		
	
	
	
 rude
2. The cards of ________ colours are mixed together. Can you separate them?   
     
 same  	 	
	
	
	
 different
3. This TV ________. We need someone to repair it.
 worked well    		
	
	
 broke down
4. Li Ling leaves you a message. This means she wants to ________.
    
 tell you something   	 	
	
 meet you at once
5. He beat me at chess. I ________.
    
 lost   	
	
	
	
	
 won
6. I’m very ________ because I missed lunch.
    
 hungry                                               
 full
Listen to Jack’s diary and complete it.
3
Dear Diary,
I felt bad today. I had a ________ with my friend Tom. Our baseball team 
________ the other team, and everyone was happy. But Tom missed the game 
because he did not get my ________. He was mad at me. I tried to explain, 
but he wouldn’t listen. He almost ________ me. I became ________, too. We 
haven’t talked to each other since our fight. I am not happy at all.
1. Did Steven come to the basketball game?
2. How did Danny try to reach Steven?
3. Why did Danny get so angry with Steven?
Have you ever had a serious dispute with a 
friend? What happened? Talk about it with 
your partner.
4
­100
Lesson 38: Making School a Better Place
• Is there a student council in your school? What does it do?
• Who do you think can work towards peace? Can you do it too?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
My name is Danielle. I’m in Grade 9 this 
year, and I’m president of the student council at 
my school. Most junior high schools in Canada 
have a student council. Members of the councils 
are chosen by students. 
Student councils work to make schools 
better places to learn. In the council, we share 
our ideas, interests and concerns with teachers 
and others. Sometimes, we plan school-wide 
activities. In December, we decided to raise 
I think we should all work for peace. 
Each of us can make a difference.
money for an organization that provides food for poor people in our city. How did 
we get the money? We organized a special basketball game in the school gym. 
Lots of students and their parents came to watch. We sold tickets and, in the end, 
we made about $300. 
During student council meetings, we have to work together, but it’s not always 
easy for us to reach an agreement. The students are from many different cultures. 
We have different religions, wear different clothes or speak different languages at 
home. Sometimes there are serious disputes. Anyway, we are all friends, so we try 
hard to understand each other. 
I think we should work together towards peace in our schools and in the world. 
We need to learn about different countries and make friends with people from 
other cultures.
A student council is a group of students that shares ideas, interests and 
concerns with teachers and school principals. It raises funds for school-
wide activities, including social events, community projects and school 
reforms.
Dig In
­101
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. Danielle is president of the student council at her school.      	
        (      )
2. The teacher chooses students as members of the student council.	        (      ) 
3. The purpose of student councils is to make schools better places to learn. (      )
4. It is easy for everyone in the student council to agree with each other.     (      )
Make sentences with “provide… for” using the given information.
2
1. this organization/food/poor people           
    → This organization provides food for poor people.                        
2. the hotel/a shoe-cleaning service/guests
    → ___________________________________________________
3. the rich land/enough food/the people
    → ___________________________________________________
Work in groups of three to complete this activity. Student A writes 
the first part, Student B writes the second part, and Student C 
combines the two parts with a conjunction (and, but, or, so). 
4
Example:
Student A	
We are friends. 
Student B	
Sometimes we have disputes.  
Student C	
We are friends, but sometimes we have disputes.
Fill in the blanks with “and”, “but”, “or” or “so”.
3
1. The Spring Festival is usually in January ________ February.
2.	I have two new classmates. One is Sandra ________ the other is Mary.
3. She doesn’t like the colour, ________ she likes the style.
4. Go right now, ________ I will punish you!
5. We have Mother’s Day and Father’s Day here, ________ no Children’s Day.
6. A tablet has no keyboard ________ mouse, ________ it is easy to carry.
7. The bud will open up ________ turn into a flower.
8.	I have no brothers ________ sisters.
A conjunction is a part of speech that connects two words, phrases, 
clauses or sentences. Look for more sentences using “and”, “but”, 
“or” or “so”.  Can you find some rules?
­102
Lesson 39: Having Good Relationships in Your Community
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
• What should you do to get along with the people around you? 
• How should you communicate with people who are doing things 
you don’t like or understand?
To work towards a peaceful life, you should always try to develop good 
relationships with the people around you. Be kind and help those in need. Do 
this not only for family and friends, but also for the people who live in your 
neighbourhood. 
People in your community might have different ways of living and thinking. 
This doesn’t mean that they’re wrong and you’re right. If everyone had the same 
ideas, the world would be a boring place. 
Today, in many cities, people usually lock their doors after work and don’t 
see their neighbours much. Social interactions are often limited to a “Hi!” on 
the street. However, there may be times when someone does something that 
upsets you. If this happens, discuss the matter in a friendly way. This allows you 
to express your ideas without damaging your relationship. Avoid arguments, 
especially ones that judge the nature of the person rather than the actions. For 
example, your neighbours are playing loud music while you try to fall asleep. 
Should you politely suggest they lower the volume? Or should you angrily shout 
at them? The first option is clearly better. By calmly examining any problems, 
you create a relationship of mutual respect and understanding. After all, good 
neighbours are better than distant relatives.  
­103
Read the lesson and tick the things that help develop good 
relationships in your community.
1
Let’s Do It!
Circle the correct prepositions to complete the sentences.
2
 Offer help to those in need.
 Respect your neighbours and be kind to them.
 If your neighbours have different ways of living, tell them they are wrong.
 If your neighbours do something that upsets you, discuss the matter in a 
friendly way. 
 If your neighbours play loud music, force them to turn it off immediately.
1. He is always ready to help those (in/with) need.
2. We wish to develop a long-term business relationship (with/for) you.
3. I have to limit my talk (of/to) 20 minutes. 
4. As a matter of fact, most disputes can be solved (in/to) a friendly way.
5. One of the best ways (on/of) learning a foreign language is to use it in 
practice.
There is one mistake in each sentence. Can you find and correct it?
3
1. The task wasn’t as bored as I first thought.
    _____________________________________________________________
2. I left the day away without do anything at all. 
    _____________________________________________________________
3. His parents won’t allow him staying out late.
    _____________________________________________________________
4. He put the animals — dogs, cats, birds and snakes on the ship and lock the 
door.
    _____________________________________________________________
5. There are time when my neighbour asks me to look after her pet dog.
    _____________________________________________________________
Work in pairs. Suppose you are asked to give some tips about 
working towards peace in the community. Please list 3 to 5 “Do’s 
and Don’ts” for people in your community.
4
­104
Lesson 40: The UN — The Power of Words
• Words or war — which do you think is more powerful?
• Do you know there is an international organization which tries to 
prevent war? What is its name?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
In the early twentieth century, people suffered 
through many wars. When World War II was over, an 
organization called the United Nations (the UN) was 
formed to help countries talk about their problems 
instead of fighting. That was in 1945. 
Today there are 193 member states in the UN. The 
headquarters of the UN is in New York City. The 
head of the UN, chosen by all the member states, is 
called the Secretary-General. The UN Security Council has fifteen members, five 
of which are permanent members — China, France, Russia, the U.K. and the U.S.
Many times since 1945, the UN has sent armies to keep peace between two 
fighting countries. It helps the situation, but sometimes it is not successful. 
It is not always easy for the members to reach an agreement. Just imagine how 
difficult it is to satisfy all 193 members! However, the UN is still the best way for 
the world to solve its problems. Let’s hope that the great idea they had in 1945 to 
prevent war will last forever.
Words — even angry words — are always better than war!
Besides the Security Council, there are other important parts of the 
UN. For example, the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural 
Organization (UNESCO) is a specialized agency. One of its jobs is to protect 
important cultural sites. It has recognized many famous places in China. Can 
you name some of these places?
Dig In
­105
What do you know about the UN? Read the lesson and fill in the 
mind map.
1
Let’s Do It!
situation         agreement         satisfy         Secretary-General
A SPEECH ABOUT PREVENTING WAR
PROJECT
We all love peace and hate war. War brings suffering to people. 
How can we put an end to war? Imagine you are representing China 
at the United Nations. Make a speech about how the United Nations 
should work to prevent war.
Present your speech to a small group of classmates and listen to 
their speeches. Talk about your speeches in groups. Ask each other 
questions about your opinions and other information you learned.
the Secretary-General
to keep peace between 
two fighting countries
the UN
Here is a speech that was given at a UN meeting. Read the speech 
and fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
2
Mr. ________, my fellow delegates, ladies and gentlemen, 
It is a great honour for me to stand here and speak to you all. We know 
this is no ordinary time for our people. Each of us comes here with our 
own problems. Sometimes we cannot reach an ________. Sometimes the 
________ is very serious. And most of the time, we cannot ________ 
everyone. But it is not impossible! We should work together to make the 
world a better place to live. More peace, less war!
­106
• What do you do when your friends misunderstand you?
• When you get into a fight with a friend, which of you usually says 
sorry first?
Lesson 41: Jenny’s Good Advice
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Danny and Steven haven’t talked 
to each other for a few days. Will they 
ever be friends again? 
Jenny: I’m glad you agreed to come 
to my house. Would either of you 
like a cookie?
Steven: Yes, please! You make great 
cookies, Jenny.
Danny: I agree.
Jenny: Thank you. I’m glad you can 
agree on something.
Jenny: What do you have to say about 
that, Danny?
Danny: Some of our teammates had to 
go to the Old Age Home and help the 
elders that morning. Everyone else 
agreed on the new time. I tried to let 
Steven know.
Steven: But I didn’t see the message!
Jenny: Steven, I think Danny really 
tried to reach you. 
Danny: (Danny looks at Steven.) Well, 
next time, I guess I will go to you 
directly. I’m sorry you missed the 
game.
Steven: Well, I didn’t check my 
messages carefully. And I am sorry I 
hit you with the basketball. I didn’t 
mean to do it, Danny.
(Slowly, a smile comes across Danny’s 
face. Then they both begin to laugh.)
Jenny: It’s good to see you are friends 
again. After all, it’s just a game!
Danny: And it’s only my head!
Danny and Steven eat their cookies 
in silence. They won’t look at each 
other, and neither of them wants to talk.
Jenny: Now, do you two want to keep 
silent forever? Do you really want 
to stop being friends?
Steven: (He looks down at the floor.) 
When everyone agrees on a time, it 
shouldn’t be changed.
­107
Let’s Do It!
1 Listen to the dialogue and answer the questions.
1
1. Is Danny free on Saturday afternoon?
2. Who else does Jenny invite?
3. Why does Jenny invite them?
mean to       agree on       keep silent       after all
1 Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box.
2
Danny and Steven didn’t talk to each other for a few days. That Saturday, 
they both went to Jenny’s house, but they all ____________ at first. Jenny 
encouraged them to talk about the problem. Steven complained that Danny 
shouldn’t change the time they ____________. Danny explained the situation. 
He felt sorry that Steven missed the game. Steven said sorry to Danny because 
his basketball hit Danny on the head. But he didn’t ____________ do it. It was 
an accident. The two boys became friends again. ____________, friends are 
more important than a game.
1 Work in groups of three. Pretend there is a dispute between two 
friends. Can you think of something to say to keep them from fighting?
3
Dispute: Ben and Tim planned to go to the movie theatre together this Saturday. 
Tim arrived at the theatre on time, but Ben didn’t show up the whole evening. 
Ben thought their plan was for Sunday. Now, Tim is upset and he hasn’t spoken 
to Ben for a week.
Your advice:
• __________________________________________________
   __________________________________________________
• __________________________________________________
   __________________________________________________
• __________________________________________________
   __________________________________________________
­108
• What is the meaning of “peacemaker”?
• Do you know any sayings about friendship? What are they?
Lesson 42: Peace at Last
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Danny,
I am happy that you and Steven are friends again. Remember the old saying: 
A good friendship makes life happier!  
I have had similar experiences. Sometimes friends don’t agree with each 
other. But if we can sit down and talk about the problems together, many of 
them can be solved. We all want peace rather than fighting. 
Jenny is a good peacemaker. We need more peacemakers in the world.
Li Ming
Dear Li Ming,
Did you ever have a fight with a good friend? It is a really 
bad feeling if friends don’t talk to each other for a couple of 
days. That’s how I felt last week. 
You see, I had a big fight with Steven. He and I play on the same basketball 
team. Our last game was moved to an earlier time, but Steven didn’t get 
my message, so of course he missed the game. He was angry. He threw his 
basketball, and it hit me. Steven and I were ready to beat each other!
Thanks to Jenny, everything is OK now. We held a meeting yesterday. We had a 
good talk and solved our problems. We said sorry to each other.
I’m happy we are friends again. Friendship is important, and we should not 
fight over such a small matter. 
I have to go now — Steven is knocking at my door. Talk to you soon.
Danny
­109
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Danny was feeling bad last week.                	 	
	
	
(      )
2. Li Ming had a fight with Steven.                 	
	
	
	
(      )
3. Many problems can be solved if friends talk about them.	
	
(      )
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box. 
2
hold a meeting     thanks to     rather than     knock at 
1. ____________ the kind-hearted couple, the homeless boy has a new family.
2. Tom! Go and see who is ____________ the door.
3. We ____________ to answer all questions yesterday.
4. I would like to ride a bicycle ____________ drive a car.
Choose the correct answers.
3
Read the following proverbs about friendship. Translate them into 
Chinese and discuss some of them with your friends.
4
A friend in need is a friend indeed. 
A good friend is like a mirror.
Tell me about your friends, and I’ll tell you who you are.
A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart.
The friends of our friends are our friends.
Group A:
1. When two dogs ________ a bone, a third one takes the bone and carries it 
    away.
2. All countries should work together to ________ global warming. 
3. I don’t want to ________ my cousin because she’s my best friend.
    A. fight with     	 	
B. fight against     	 C. fight over
Group B:
1. This is the time we all ________. You cannot change it.
2. I usually ________ you, but this time I disagree.
3. We all ________ help her, but we don’t know what to do.
    A. agree with   	
	
B. agree to   	 	
C. agree on
­110
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Grammar in Use
I. Complete the sentences with the correct words. The first letter is given.
1. Look out for spelling mistakes when you c________ your homework. 
2. A s________ is a kind of animal that has no legs to move.
3. With a lot of practice, we finally b________ that strong team.
4. The children were s________ into groups for the game.
5. When you leave the house, make sure to l________ the door.
II. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box.
1. Yesterday I called you, but your phone was ____________.
2. The final examination is coming. All the students are busy ____________ it. 
3. It’s very kind of him to ____________ food ____________ the poor.
4. After a long discussion, we finally ____________.
5. She sat alone ____________ for a long time. 
out of service    provide… for    in silence    prepare for    reach an agreement
Join the clauses using “and”, “but”, “or” or “so”.
Listening and Speaking
Listen to the dialogue and complete it. Then act it out.
A: Hi! I’m a journalist from China Daily. Can I interview your band? 
He can understand French, 
I fell off my bike
I know her face,
Hurry up,
Do you want to play the game
That man never tells the truth,
June had a bad headache,
will you just watch?
she stayed in bed.
we will be late for school.
nobody likes to talk with him.
I can’t remember her name.
he can’t speak it.
hurt my knees.
but
and
or
so
­111
Putting It All Together
Read the passage and answer the questions.
Get Together and Talk Things Over!
Sometimes even best friends have fights. They disagree with each other 
and begin to argue. Sometimes they even stop talking to each other. If they are 
really good friends, though, they will try to fix things up. There are usually two 
sides to every story, so it is helpful if you can get someone else to listen to both 
sides.
Maybe you have a good friend who knows both of you. You can ask him or 
her to have a meeting with you and listen to what each of you has to say. The 
main thing is for the two of you to get together and talk things over.
When you get together, try not to be angry. Listen to what your friend has 
to say. Then tell your point of view. You might be surprised. Sometimes all it 
takes is talking together to work things out. After all, a disagreement is just 
that. You might even forget the whole thing. You might even make friends with 
your old friend all over again!
A. Discussion is always a good way to solve disagreements.
B. How do you solve those problems?
C. Do you always agree with each other?
D. Do you sometimes argue?
1. Why do best friends have fights and begin to argue?
2. Who should you find to listen to both sides? 
3. What are some key things to keep in mind when you get together to talk
    things over?
B: No problem.
A: Your band has wonderful musicians. _______________________                             
B: Not always. Sometimes we have different ideas.
A: _______________________                               
B: We sit and talk. 
A: _______________________                                  
B: Yes. Sometimes we argue with each other. Once, I didn’t talk to Sam for three 
days after a fight. When we cooled down, we discussed the problem.
A: _______________________                                      
­112
The army gathered — they prepared to fight.
Out of war, please let there come peace.
They held their guns, smoke hid the light.
Out of war, please let there come peace.
The soldiers stood beside each other.
They must obey, do as they’re told.
Battle rages — no heroes.
Out of war, please let there come peace.
The leaders hold so many meetings.
After war, please let there be peace.
We hope they agree to do something.
After war, please let there be peace.
They talk together, then make a speech.
The war must end, they all agree.
Put the guns down — no heroes.
After war, please let there be peace.
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from the unit. Then mark your stars.
I. Talking about Disputes and 
Settlements
We are all friends, so we try hard to    
understand each other.                          
______________________________
______________________________
I can talk about disputes and 
settlements in English.
II. Conjunctions: and, but, or, so
I’m in Grade 9 this year, and I’m           
president of the student council at my 
school.                                                            
______________________________
______________________________
I can use “and”, “but”, “or” and “so” 
properly.
Please Let There Be Peace
­113
Lessons 43 ~ 48
Culture Shapes Us
Functions
 Talking about Cultural Differences
Grammar
 Adverbial Clause with “though” or “although”
Structures
 Although sayings are usually simple and easy to
  remember, they are full of deep meaning.
 Human beings share similar hopes and fears.
 Though I have lived here for a long time, I still don’t 
   feel Canadian.
 I think understanding cultural differences really helps 
   us to understand each other, live together and work
   together.  
UNIT
8
We Will Learn
­114
Lesson 43: A Visit to Chinatown 
• What do you usually do to prepare for the Spring Festival?
• What Western festivals are celebrated in China?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
It’s Saturday evening. Li Ming, Jenny and Brian are chatting online.
Jenny: Hi Li Ming! Guess what we 
did today!
Li Ming: I have no idea. Did you go 
shopping? I know Christmas is 
coming.
Brian: You are smart. But did you 
know that we went shopping in 
Chinatown?
Li Ming: Really? Did you have a 
good time? 
Brian: Yes. We bought a big Christmas 
tree, some decorations and gifts. 
I really enjoyed the lunch we had 
there. I had a bowl of noodles, and I 
used chopsticks and a spoon instead 
of a fork and a knife.
Jenny: My parents love to have lunch 
and shop there, although parking is 
a problem. My dad had to park his 
car in the underground parking lot.
Li Ming: Do they speak Chinese there?
Brian: In the stores and restaurants, 
people spoke English to me, but 
many of them speak Chinese to 
each other. And there were red 
lanterns everywhere.
Jenny: Danny and I watched 
a wonderful dragon dancing 
performance during the Spring 
Festival last year.
Li Ming: That’s interesting. I hope we 
have a North American town here.  
Brian: Then you can celebrate 
Christmas and get gifts from Santa 
Claus.
Li Ming: I love Santa Claus. Do you 
believe it’s Santa Claus who brings 
you gifts, Brian?
Brian: Of course not. Only little kids 
believe that. But we do have lots of 
fun. 
Jenny: What do you usually do during 
the Spring Festival, Li Ming?
Li Ming: There are so many special 
things about the Spring Festival. 
Young children usually get gifts — 
lucky money. We eat dumplings 
and many other delicious foods. We 
have temple fairs and all kinds of 
performances. It’s the most important 
festival in China.
Brian: I hope I can go to Chinatown 
again to see the Spring Festival.
­115
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
1. Jenny and Brian went shopping in Chinatown. 	
	
	
   (       )
2. Jenny and her parents live in Chinatown.  	
	
	
	
   (       )
3. There’s a North American town in China. 	
	
	
	
   (       )
4. Some Chinese people eat dumplings during the Spring Festival. 	   (       )
What utensils do you usually use? Look at the pictures and fill in 
the blanks.
2
When you eat noodles, you usually use ____________.
When you eat steak, you usually use ____________.
When you eat porridge, you usually use ____________.
When you drink milk, you usually use ____________.
When you drink tea, you usually use ____________.
cup
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
THE SPRING FESTIVAL AND CHRISTMAS
How do Chinese people celebrate the Spring Festival? How do Western 
PROJECT
people celebrate Christmas? Read the following facts and use them to fill in 
the circles. Think about what facts can go in the middle. What else do you 
know about these holidays?
• make dumplings    • buy new clothes    • clean up the house    
• give lucky money to children    • hang red lanterns	    • sing Christmas songs 
• visit relatives and friends    • go to a temple fair   • decorate a Christmas tree 
• buy some Christmas gifts    • attend a family get-together
The Spring Festival
Christmas
­116
Lesson 44: Popular Sayings
• Do you know any English or Chinese sayings? What are they?
• Do you use sayings in your daily life? Give an example.
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Seeing is believing.
Where there is a will, there is a way.
An apple a day keeps the doctor away.
Have you ever heard these old sayings? Sayings are an important part of the 
language and culture of every society. Although sayings are usually simple and 
easy to remember, they are full of deep meaning. They come from the experience 
of generations of people, and from different walks of life. Take a look at these 
sayings:
Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise.
A journey of a thousand miles begins with a single step.
Well begun is half done.
Don’t be penny wise and pound foolish.
Actions speak louder than words.
Many hands make light work.
These sayings help people understand the world and form good habits, or 
encourage people to work hard and as a team. Whether the sayings are in Chinese, 
English, or any other language, they share something in common. 
Do you know the English for the 
Chinese saying “ai wu ji wu”? That’s 
“Love me, love my dog”. And “Every 
dog has his day” is similar to the 
Chinese saying “shi nian he dong, shi 
nian he xi”. Although Chinese sayings 
use images of animals or things other 
than dogs, the meanings are almost the 
same. Human beings share similar hopes 
and fears.
­117
Let’s Do It!
Read the Chinese sayings below and find the matching English 
expressions from the lesson.
1
Fill in the blanks using the sayings from the lesson.
2
1. Seeing is believing. We warmly welcome you to visit our factory.
2. ______________________________. It is very important to make a 
    good start.
3. Cleaning the room will not take long if we all help. You know,                       
    ______________________________.
4. ______________________________. We should do more and speak less.
5. Although you failed the exam, you shouldn’t give up. Remember     
    ______________________________.
Work in pairs. Discuss the meanings of the following sayings. Can 
you find the matching Chinese sayings? Then make sentences 
with the sayings you have learned.
3
• When in Rome, do as the Romans do.
• First come, first served.
• It is never too late to mend.
• No pain, no gain.
爱屋及乌。
眼见为实。
十年河东,十年河西。
行动重于言辞。
千里之行,始于足下。
众人拾柴火焰高。
不要小事聪明,大事糊涂。
有志者事竟成。
 Love me, love my dog.       
­118
Lesson 45: Different Manners 
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
• In your opinion, what are good manners?
• Do you think cultures shape manners?
My name is Wu Zhou. I have lived in Canada for 
twenty-three years. In Canada, I call myself Joe Wu. 
Joe is an English name that sounds like Zhou.
Though I have lived here for a long time, I still 
don’t feel Canadian. This is probably because North 
American manners and Chinese manners are so 
different. 
In China, being modest is a virtue. If someone 
praises you and says that your English is excellent, 
you should be modest and say, “No, no. My English 
is still poor.” But in North America, this is usually 
a sign of being weak and not confident. You should 
just say, “Thank you.”
I have many good friends in 
Canada, though Canadian 
culture is different from 
Chinese culture.
In Canada, people only ask children about their age. It’s not polite to ask an 
adult’s age. They think it is private. But this is common in many places in China. 
In both China and North America, it is polite to offer an elderly person a seat 
on the bus. In North America, however, an elderly person may feel embarrassed 
about being offered a seat.
When Chinese people eat out in restaurants, they may take turns paying for the 
meal. In Canada, however, people often share the cost of a meal.
In China, if your guests have no food on their plates, it’s polite to put food on 
their plates. In Canada, you pass food to guests, but you don’t usually put food on 
their plates.
In China, people seldom give extra money to waiters, waitresses, taxi drivers or 
hotel workers. In North America, this is always done. It is called “tipping”.
It’s interesting to experience two different cultures. I think understanding 
cultural differences really helps us to understand each other, live together and 
work together. 
­119
Read the lesson and match the behaviours with the correct 
countries.
1
Let’s Do It!
Match and complete the sentences.
2
Fill in the blanks with the words or phrases in the box.
3
pay for      praise      take turns      modest      private
1. We should ________ little Debbie for her courage.
2. It’s a long way. We can ________ driving. 
3. They asked him to ________ the damage, but he refused.
4. Don’t talk about other people’s ________ things. It’s not polite.
5. Jack is a ________ man who is admired by many people.
What cultural differences, besides the ones already discussed, 
have you noticed between China and English-speaking countries? 
Share your ideas with your classmates.
4
asking an adult’s age
putting food on a guest’s plate
giving a tip to waiters and hotel workers
Canada
China
sharing the cost of a meal in a restaurant
Although people have different 
cultures and customs,
Brian hasn’t been to China, 
Though Liu Feng has many friends 
in America,
He has been at the new school for only 
a few days, 
but he has already made 
many friends there.
he still feels lonely.
but he knows a lot 
about our country.
they have the same 
feelings.
Note that we should not use “although/though” and “but” together in 
the same sentence.
­120
Lesson 46: Home to Many Cultures
• Why are there different cultures in one country?
• What are some of the cultural differences between different people
   and places in China?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Canada is home to many 
cultures. Three percent of all 
Canadians are First Nations 
people. The people of the First 
Nations were there before other 
people came to North America. 
Now more than half of Canadians 
have British or French blood. 
The rest are from every part of 
the world: Asia, Africa, Central 
In Canada, people from many cultures live together.
America, South America, Australia and other European countries.
Canada became a country in 1867, and for more than a hundred years, most 
immigrants in the country were from Europe. In the 1970s and 1980s, that 
changed. According to a survey, the number of European immigrants dropped 
from 90 percent to 25 percent, and the number of Asian immigrants rose from 3 
percent to 48 percent.
Although Canada has two official languages — English and French, most 
Canadians do not speak both. Many immigrants speak two languages — the 
language of their first country and English or French. Canada welcomes cultural 
differences in the people who live there. 
So what is a Canadian? That’s a little hard to describe. Canada does not have 
one culture — it has many. It is important that people from different cultures can 
live together in one country.
Is there a Canadian food? Not really. Is there a Canadian kind of music? No. 
Is there a Canadian way of understanding the world? Yes. It’s that people should 
respect and accept one another and help one another. It’s important to keep 
different languages, religions and customs alive. 
­121
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
Let’s Do It!
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the given words.
2
1. He came back from ________ (Canada) three years ago, but he keeps in 
touch with his ________ (Canada) friends. 
2. If you could travel to only one ________ (Europe) country, which one would 
you choose? 
3. He wonders what this means for the future of ________ (Asia) markets. 
4. Understanding cultural ________ (difference) is very important for 
companies involved in international business. 
5. I’d like to take you to our city’s ________ (centre) park. 
1. What percent of Canadians are from the First Nations?
2. What languages do most immigrants to Canada speak?
3. Why are there many cultures in Canada?
4. What’s the Canadian way of understanding the world?
Make sentences using the given information. 
3
1. the number of websites/22 in 2009/315 in 2013/the report 
    (rise from… to, according to) 
The number of websites rose from 22 in 2009 to 315 in 2013, according    
to the report. 
2.	the price of it/$25 a kilogram in 2003/$250 this year/the research 
    (rise from… to, according to)
    ____________________________________________________________
3.	David’s weight/150 pounds last month/120 pounds this month/his doctor 
    (drop from… to, according to)
    ____________________________________________________________
Work in groups. List some traditional 
Chinese customs. Try to find the similarities 
and differences between Chinese and other 
cultures.
4
­122
• How do you usually treat a guest in your home?
• How are you treated when you visit your friend’s house?
Lesson 47: Good Manners
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Mr. Manners,
I’m a student visiting Russia. I’m going 
to stay for three months. One of my 
classmates invited me to stay overnight 
at her house. It will be my first time 
visiting a Russian house. What should I 
do to be a polite guest?
Dong Fang
Dear Dong Fang,
Here are some small suggestions for 
you.
Bring a small gift, such as sweets or 
flowers. 
Follow the rules of your host’s home. 
Do what your host asks you to do.
Don’t be noisy, especially at bedtime.
Offer to help prepare the dinner.
Write a thank-you note after your visit.
Visiting a local family is a great way to 
experience another culture. Remember 
to be yourself and have fun. 
Mr. Manners
Mr. Manners,
I’m a Grade 9 student. My Australian 
pen pal is coming to Beijing next 
week. I invited him for dinner at my 
home, and he accepted. What should 
I do to make him feel welcome? How 
can I be a good host? 
Li Ming
Dear Li Ming,
A good host always tries to make 
guests feel welcome. Here are some 
tips for you.
Tidy up your house before your guest 
arrives. 
Open the door for your guest and 
hang up his coat. It will make him feel 
welcome. 
Offer your guest something to drink or 
eat like tea, fruit and snacks.  
Don’t ask your guest to go to the 
kitchen and serve himself! Serve your 
guest at the table. 
Make him feel at home. Talk to your 
guest. That’s why you invited him. 
Don’t turn on the television. It’s OK 
in China, but it’s considered rude in 
Western cultures. 
Mr. Manners
­123
Let’s Do It!
1 Read the lesson and fill in the table.
1
1 Circle the correct words to complete the sentences.
2
Mr. Manner’s tips for Li Ming
Mr. Manner’s tips for Dong Fang
1. I said sorry for being too (noisy/noise).
2. The book I read was written in (Russian/Russia).
3. Please (tidy up/divide up) your closet. It’s a mess.
4. Big lights (hung/hanged) from the ceiling. They looked beautiful.
1 Imagine you visited a Canadian friend’s house yesterday. Write a 
short letter to your host. 
3
1 Listen and sing along.
4
We welcome you to our home.
You are all our guests.
We’d like to offer you some dinner,
Then a bed to rest.
You may find that our home is different from yours.
Would you like something to eat or drink?
Would you like some more?
We try to keep our culture.
We don’t find it strange.
I would like to learn about your ways,
So we can be friends.
So We Can Be Friends
Task tips:
You can thank him for the kind things he did for you. You can also mention 
some of the cultural differences you experienced in his home.
­124
• How do you react when you receive a gift you don’t like?
• When your family visits another, what do you usually take as a gift?
Lesson 48: Supper with the Bradshaws
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Danny,
How are you these days? Are you ready for Christmas? 
My Australian pen pal, Bruce, and his father, came to visit me the day before 
yesterday. Last night, my parents invited them to our home for dinner. At the 
end of the meal, Mr. Bradshaw opened a box of cookies he had brought from 
home. He then passed the box to everyone. We each took a cookie and ate it. 
The cookie tasted like chalk to me! But in good Chinese tradition, I told Mr. 
Bradshaw that I enjoyed it. 
At the airport today, Mr. Bradshaw gave me a big box of the same cookies as a 
gift. I don’t know what we’ll do with them.
Merry Christmas and Happy New Year!
Li Ming
Hi Li Ming,
I am so busy with Christmas these days.
I couldn’t help but laugh when I read your e-mail. I can imagine your reaction 
when you received the cookies. Maybe you can send them to me. I love all kinds 
of cookies. But I think you were polite to react that way. I love Chinese culture. 
I wish everyone here, especially Debbie, could learn some Chinese manners. 
Debbie dreams of being a police officer. She once said that she hoped to have a 
toy gun as a Christmas gift, so I bought one for her. But when I gave it to her, she 
said she wanted a doll! She changes her mind so quickly!  
Though I was a little hurt, I still enjoyed Christmas very much. We had a lot 
of fun. We are planning another trip to Chinatown during the Spring Festival. I 
love festivals.  
Danny
­125
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Li Ming liked Mr. Bradshaw’s cookies. 	
	
	
	
(      )
2. Li Ming accepted Mr. Bradshaw’s gift although he didn’t like it.   	(      )
3. Debbie liked the toy gun that Danny gave her as a Christmas gift.  (      )            
4. Danny is planning another trip to Chinatown.		
	
	
(      )
Complete the passage with the correct forms of the words in the box.
2
officer        gun        praise        catch        react
There was a robbery yesterday afternoon. Two men rushed into the City Bank 
with ________ in their hands. All the people were scared except a smart clerk. 
She ________ quickly and pushed the alarm immediately. Soon the robbers 
________ by the police ________. Luckily, there was no loss or injuries. This 
clerk ________ by the mayor.
Let’s do a quick quiz!
3
You know about Santa Claus, don’t you? He’s that man in red clothes. 
He has a long, white beard. He wears black boots. He says, “Ho! Ho! Ho!” 
He and Christmas go together. Over the years, the stories about Santa Claus 
have grown. He has an address, a special type of transportation and a special 
way to get into children’s houses. Do you know what they are? Let’s do a 
quiz!
1. Where does Santa Claus live?
2. Santa rides in a sleigh. What animals pull his sleigh?
3. Children believe that Santa visits them on Christmas Eve. How does he get 
into their houses?
1. It is said that Santa Claus lives at the North Pole. 
2. Reindeer pull Santa’s sleigh.
3. Santa comes down the chimney. When he leaves, he goes up the chimney.
­126
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Grammar in Use
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box.
1. ________ cannot be owned or carried in many countries.
2. Though personal letters are ________, some parents open their children’s 
letters.
3. In some public places, there are ________ against making any noise. 
4. The mother ________ her kid for ________ the table after the meal.
5. ________ can make tools, but animals can’t.
6. The teacher drew a horse on the blackboard with ________.
7. The branches of the trees along the river ________ down and touched the 
water.
Combine the sentences with “though” or “although”.
1. It’s late. The teacher is still working in his office.
2. It’s blowing hard. They will go out to repair the street lamps.
3. He didn’t know the poor old man. He bought lunch for him.
4. He made a serious mistake. His parents finally forgave him.  
5. Bill is dead. He will be remembered by his friends.
human    gun    private    tidy    chalk    hang    rule    praise  
Listening and Speaking
I. Listen to the passage and fill in the blanks.
1. In Western countries, people usually have ________ names.
2. Brian James Smith is Brian’s ________ name.
3. In Western countries, people talk about their “________”, “________” and 
“________” names.
4. In Western countries, people usually call a person’s ________ name.
­127
II. Imagine that a Canadian friend comes to visit your house. What should 
you do to make him or her feel comfortable? Make up a dialogue with 
your partner and act it out.
Putting It All Together
Read the passage and follow the instructions.
Table Manners
What are some good manners in your hometown? What else do you know 
about table manners? Write about it. 
Example: 
• In my hometown, it’s polite to serve food to our guests.
• It’s rude to put your elbows on the table in my city. 
• Talking when you have food in your mouth is really rude. 
• It’s not polite to use a toothpick at the table.
All societies have customs about how 
to eat politely. In English, we call these 
customs “table manners”. Based on culture 
and location, table manners can be quite 
different from place to place. It’s very 
interesting! Here are some examples:     
• In some cultures, it’s polite to serve 
food to guests, while in other cultures, 
people don’t do this because it makes the guests feel like they are being 
forced to eat. 
• In most East Asian countries, people use chopsticks at the table. In 
Western countries, people usually eat with a knife and a fork. Do you know 
that in some places people simply use their hands to eat? And in some 
places, only their right hand?     
• In Russia, it’s polite to leave a bit of food on your plate to show the host 
that there was plenty to eat. But in India, finishing the food on your plate is 
considered polite. It means you enjoyed the food.
Throughout the world, you will find many different table manners and 
customs. So when you visit another place or another country, take the time 
to learn the local customs and manners. Remember, “When in Rome, do as 
the Romans do”.
­128
I come from a foreign country.
I am so much different from you.
So if I make
A cultural mistake,
Would you please tell me what to do?
Where I come from, we shake hands in greeting,
And ask, “How are you?”
We say “please” and “thank you”
During a meeting
And forgive a mistake or two.
What’s one of the special customs
Your society likes to use?
Something you say
To your friends each day
That you could teach me, too?
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
Where I Come From 
I. Talking about Cultural Differences
I think understanding cultural differences
really helps us to understand each other,  
live together and work together.                     
______________________________
______________________________
I know how to express cultural 
differences in English.
II. Adverbial Clause with “though” or 
“although”
Though I was a little hurt, I still              
enjoyed Christmas very much.               
______________________________
______________________________
I can use “though” and “although” 
properly.
­129
Lessons 49 ~ 54
Communication
Functions
 Talking about Interpersonal Communication
Structures
 Friendship requires good communication.
 Smiling can be a passport to good communication.
 Somehow, he had to adapt to this new environment.
 She realizes that talking about problems is better 
   than keeping them as secrets.
UNIT
9
We Will Learn
­130
Lesson 49: Get Along with Others
• Do you have good relationships with the people in your life?
• What do you think is most important for a good friendship?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Ms. Liu: Hi class! We have an interesting topic for 
this unit. First, let me ask you a question: How do 
you get along with others in school or at home?
Li Ming: I think I’m doing well. I have many friends. 
Wang Mei: I have many friends, too. We have a lot of 
fun together. 
Ms. Liu: Do you always get along well with your 
friends?
Wang Mei: Well, not always… Sometimes friends have misunderstandings. 
Sometimes a friend really hurts you without realizing it.
Li Ming: That’s true. Friendship requires 
good communication. 
Ms. Liu: Very good point. If we can’t 
communicate well, we can hardly get 
along with our friends. It’s the same 
with family relationships.
Yang Hao: I guess that people who know 
how to communicate well with others 
are happier and more satisfied with their 
lives. They are more likely to succeed in 
their jobs.
Ms. Liu: Exactly! That’s why communication is very important. It’s always 
better to get things out in the open — talk about a problem, come to a solution 
or move on. Bad feelings like hate and anger can make you seriously ill. This 
week we’ll talk more about communication. Hopefully, we’ll all learn to get 
along better with each other! 
­131
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and match the people with their statements.
1
Rewrite the sentences below with the correct forms of the phrases 
from the lesson. 
2
1. It took them more than an hour to solve the problem.
    → It took them more than an hour to ____________.
2. We had a wonderful time in the park.
    → We had ____________ in the park.
Change the following adjectives into adverbs and use them to 
complete the sentences.
3
1. Using the search engines, you can ________ find books in this library.
2. Here is a book on grammar. ________, it will help you with your study.
3. The old lady walked ________ slowly. It took her a long time to get there.  
4. I’m sorry to hear that. Was she ________ hurt?
5. Jim must have copied Paul’s work because they made ________ the same 
mistakes.
easy ________	
hopeful ________	 	
exact ________  
real ________	
	
serious ________
Friendship requires good communication. 
People who know how to communicate well with 
others are more likely to succeed in their jobs.
It’s always better to get things out in the open.
Sometimes friends have misunderstandings.
Work in groups. Share your ideas about communication. You can 
use “I think…”, “I guess…”, “That’s for sure!”, “That’s true!” or 
“Good point!”.
4
­132
Lesson 50: Tips for Good Communication
• How do you communicate with a new friend?
• In your opinion, what are the best ways to communicate?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Do you have many friends? Do you have fun together? Do you feel 
comfortable when talking to others? Have you ever found it hard to make new 
friends? Here are some tips for good interpersonal communication:
● Remember other people’s names. Make a great effort to do this when you 
first meet someone new. Then when you meet again, you will easily make that 
person feel comfortable if you remember his or her name. It shows you care. 
● Smile. Make sure you smile and greet others in a friendly way, especially 
the first time you meet them. Smiling can be a passport to good communication.
● Find a proper topic. Talk about the weather, sports or news. You can 
also ask questions or tell jokes. The main thing is to find a topic you are both 
interested in.
● Be a good listener. Good listeners show others that they are interested 
in the conversation. People will be happy to talk to you if you are listening 
carefully. One simple way to show you are a good listener is to make eye 
contact.
● Be honest. Tell people the truth. No one wants to waste time talking to 
someone who is not honest.
● Keep your promises. Try 
not to be late. If you set a time 
to meet your friends, do your 
best to be on time. If you have 
to change your plan or cancel 
it, let your friends know ahead 
of time. People will trust those 
who always keep their promises.
­133
Let’s Do It!
Some people are talking about ways to communicate well. Listen 
to the interview and match the names with their suggestions.
1
Here are some tips for good communication. Group them into the 
baskets below.
2
1. If you want to ________ the meeting, you must inform us a week before.
2. She could not find a ________ solution to this problem.
3. Zhang Jian plans to go abroad but he needs to get a ________ first.
4. I can’t make a ________, but I’ll try my best.
promise       cancel       proper       passport
Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
3
Work in pairs. Think about your family and friends. What makes 
you happy in the way they communicate with others? Talk about it.
4
Jane 
Be aware of your body language.
Always keep a smile on your face.
Make eye contact.
Dan
Chrissy
Julie
Don’t interrupt others when they are talking.
  Talk about the weather, sports or other news.
Find a proper 
topic.
Be a good 
listener.
 Be honest.
Keep your 
promises.
A
  Don’t tell lies.
F
  Don’t interrupt others.
G
  Try not to be late.
H
  Tell an interesting story.
B
  Tell jokes.
D
  Listen carefully.
C
  Don’t break your promises.
E
­134
Lesson 51: What Could Be Wrong?
• Have you had any problems with your friends?
• When you have a problem with a friend, what do you usually do?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Lost Girl,
Many people have had the same experience as you. 
Sometimes it’s pretty hard to tell what’s wrong 
in a friendship. Try writing to your friend or you 
can ask another friend for help. If neither of these 
things works, just leave your friend alone. She may 
need some time to cool down and think about the 
situation herself. 
Dear Sue,
There is a problem between me and my good friend. We used 
to study and play together, but ever since last Friday, she 
hasn’t spoken to me. I considered all the things that could be 
wrong, but I still can’t figure out what the problem is. I tried 
to call her, but she didn’t answer. What should I do?
A Lost Girl
If you figure out what the problem is, think about it. Did you really hurt 
your friend? If yes, go directly to her and say sorry. Maybe it was just a big 
misunderstanding. 
If your friend wants to end the friendship, there’s nothing you can do about 
it. Both of you can move on and find new friends. But even if you’re not 
friends anymore, you should still be friendly. Say hi to her when you pass her 
at school. Maybe one day she will realize what a good friend you are.
Sue
­135
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and answer the questions.
1
Listen to the reply from the Lost Girl and fill in the blanks.
2
Dear Sue,
Thanks for your advice. I wrote my friend a letter and told her I wouldn’t 
want to lose her as a friend. I asked her what was wrong. She wrote back to 
me after she ________. There was a ________. I didn’t go home with her 
last Thursday as we had planned. She ________ me, but I missed the call. 
I ________ it was all my fault. I went to her and said sorry. We are now 
friends again. I’m very happy.
The Lost Girl
1. What has happened to the Lost Girl?
2. What are Sue’s suggestions if a friend wants to end the friendship?
Read the lesson again and tick the advice Sue gave to the Lost Girl.
3
 Say sorry if you hurt your friend.
 Give your friend some time to cool down.
 Clearly express how you feel.
 Write to your friend and ask what’s wrong.
 Talk to your friend directly as soon as possible.
 You can still be friendly even if you are not friends anymore. 
 Be aware of your body language. 
DOCTOR SUE SAYS
PROJECT
Work in groups. Write about a problem between two friends on a piece 
of paper. The problem should be short and clear.
• Collect all the paper in the class.
• Shuffle the paper.
• Each group draws a piece of paper.
     Read the problem in your group and write some advice to that person.
­136
Lesson 52: The Power of a Smile
• Have you ever felt lonely? Why?
• How can you make new friends?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Students often gather together in small, closed groups. If you are not part of a 
group, it can be difficult for you to be accepted. This is especially true if you can’t 
speak to the members of the group in their language.
This was the situation Sam faced each day as he went to class. Sam and his 
family moved to France last month. Before he arrived, he knew there would be 
many difficulties. But they were even worse than he imagined.
Every lunch hour, after arriving at his new school, Sam sat alone in the dining 
hall. He looked at all the different groups of students around him. But he had no 
way to let them know that he was a good person. He simply couldn’t find the right 
words to reach them.
Sam knew he had to find a way to change the situation. Somehow, he had 
to adapt to this new environment. He did a little research on the Internet and 
discovered that smiling is a universal language — it is understood everywhere.
One morning, as Sam was walking by a group of students, he smiled at them. A 
boy in the group smiled back at him. For Sam, that was a good beginning. Later, 
he noticed the boy coming towards him in the hall with a warm smile on his face. 
Sam returned the smile.
Soon the boy asked Sam to join him and his group of friends for lunch. 
Although Sam wasn’t able to say much in French, everyone smiled and laughed. 
Before he knew it, Sam had 
a group of friends, and they 
all wanted to help him learn 
French.
That day he experienced 
the power of a smile.
­137
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and number the sentences in the correct order.
1
(      ) Sam was really lonely in his new school.
(      ) Sam was worried before he arrived in France.
(      ) When Sam smiled at another student, he received a warm smile back.
(      ) Sam tried his best to find a way to change the situation.
(      ) Sam was invited to have lunch with a group of students.
Complete each passage using the information from the list below.
2
Have you ever had to adapt to a new environment? How did you 
adapt to it? Interview your group members. 
3
Task tips:  
If “Yes”, what did you do to adapt to it? Did you try any of these ways?
• Smile at others.  
• Make friends.
• Communicate well.
• Take part in group activities.
If “No”, do you have any suggestions for those who need to adapt to a new 
environment?
A. since primary school                         B. for six weeks                   
C. who seems nice and friendly            D. what to do                       
E. the students are a close group
I’ve been at my new school ________ and I still haven’t made any friends. 
I’ve joined clubs, but I usually end up alone at the club while other kids 
gather in small groups. I don’t know who to talk to or ________.
This is the perfect question for me to answer because I have changed 
schools six times ________ and have had to make new friends each 
time! Yes, it’s always hard to make new friends in a new school because 
________. Well, here’s how I usually do it — find a person ________. 
Start a conversation with that person. I find this works very well. Good 
luck!
­138
Lesson 53: Working in Groups
• Do you like group work?
• What can you do to help your group work well together?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
“OK class,” says Ms. Liu. “It’s time for our group project. Let’s get to work!” 
Yi Han is the leader of one group. She is not looking forward to working with 
her group because a boy named Li Tian is always absent from the group meetings. 
He doesn’t follow the rules, and he refuses to do any work. This slows the whole 
group down. 
Yi Han considers telling Ms. Liu about 
these problems, but she doesn’t want to get 
Li Tian in trouble. Instead, she decides to 
talk to him and find out what the problem 
is. She says, “Everyone is working hard 
on our project. But so far, you have done 
nothing. Is there something wrong?” 
Li Tian is quiet for a few seconds, and 
finally says, “It’s not that I don’t want to be in the group. Sometimes, I don’t 
really understand the things we’re learning. I know it’s not fair, but I don’t want 
to say something stupid, so I do nothing.”
Now Yi Han understands. Li Tian isn’t lazy — he just needs help! “From now 
on,” she says, “I will do my best to help you feel more confident. Then you can 
do your share, and it will be fair for 
everyone.” “Thank you! I’ll try hard to 
do my part,” says Li Tian.
Yi Han feels happy. She realizes that 
talking about problems is better than 
keeping them as secrets.
­139
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and tick the correct answers to the questions below.
1
1. The group is working slowly. Yi Han wants to solve the problem. What does 
she do?
 Tell the teacher.
 Talk to Li Tian.
2. Li Tian has some difficulties. What are they?
 He doesn’t want to be in the group.
 He doesn’t understand the things they’re learning.
3. Knowing Yi Han decides to help him, what will Li Tian do?
 He will try hard to do his part.
 He thinks it’s not fair to do his part.
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words or phrases in 
the box.
2
1. Don’t miss “Gardening with Mary” on Saturday afternoons. Mary Green
    will share her rose growing ____________ with you.
2. Cathy ____________ school because she had a bad headache.
3. I wrote a letter to Rose. I’m ____________ her reply.
4. — How is your second-hand laptop? 
    — ____________, so good.
5. He always gets himself into ____________ by doing things carelessly. 
so far     trouble     be absent from     secret     look forward to
Have you ever had any problems while 
working in a group? How did you solve 
them? Does communication play an 
important role? Discuss it in your group.
3
A group works well if every member works hard. To make a group 
work well, it’s best to give each member a role. Take a group of four as 
an example. In the group, there should be an organizer, a recorder, a 
speaker and a rule keeper. Then each member can do his/her share.
­140
Lesson 54: How Embarrassing!
• How do you feel if you meet an old friend and he or she can’t 
remember your name? 
• Have you ever gotten back in touch with an old friend?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Diary,
This week I had an embarrassing moment at a bookstore. I ran into an 
old friend named Gao Yuan. When he tapped me on the shoulder and 
said my name, I couldn’t figure out who he was. He seemed familiar but 
I forgot his name. I felt awful. We chatted for a while. Finally I had to 
admit that I couldn’t remember his name. Before I could say sorry, he 
said he had to go and waved goodbye.
I felt bad, so I talked with Wang Mei about it. She said that she once 
had a similar experience. She forgot an old friend’s name when that 
friend returned to China after many years abroad. Wang Mei was a little 
embarrassed, too, but her friend didn’t mind. She just reminded Wang 
Mei of her name and they had a good, long chat.
After talking to Wang Mei, I felt better. I called Gao Yuan that evening. 
He was happy to hear from me, and we had a good conversation. We also 
made plans to play ping-pong together next weekend.
Yay, I got back an old friend!
­141
Let’s Do It!
Read the diary entry and retell Li Ming’s embarrassing experience 
using the hints below.
1
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box.
2
1. After living abroad for 30 years, the couple ____________ the small town.
2. We’d love to go to the party, but we ____________ for that day.
3. They ____________ their son yesterday. They were very happy.
4. I ____________ an old friend on my way to school yesterday. 
run into      return to      hear from      make plans
Listen to some kids talking about their most embarrassing 
moments and fill in the blanks.
3
Have you had any embarrassing moments? Write about them.
4
One day I was in class. The whole class was very 
quiet. ________ my cell phone rang. Many heads 
________ my direction. The teacher walked up to 
me. My face turned red. I felt so nervous that I could 
________ breathe. Then I heard myself say in a 
shaking voice “You want it?” How embarrassing!!!
run into… familiar… couldn’t remember… 
awful… chat…   
My most embarrassing moment was during an award 
ceremony at the end of the year. I was sitting at the front. 
The host announced a special ________ and I heard my 
name, so I went up on the ________. It turned out that it 
was the other girl. The ________ part was walking back to 
my seat in front of everyone! Imagine how embarrassed I 
was!
­142
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
I. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the given words.
1. In the past two years, they have gone through many _______ (difficult).
2. It’s good for friends to speak _______ (direct) to one another.
3. We need to be a good ________ (listen) if we want to ask right questions.  
4. They don’t talk to each other anymore. There might be some ________
    (understand) between them. 
5. We are learning from each other. We need good ________ (communicate). 
II. Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box.
1. You’d better ____________ to meet your cousin at the airport.
2. If you can ____________ the problem, try to find a way to solve it.
3. You have to be happy with yourself before you can ____________ others.
4. I hope you can ____________ the new environment quickly.
5. All of us want to ____________ life.
figure out    get along with    succeed in    keep one’s promise    adapt to  
Grammar in Use
I. Fill in the blanks with “who”, “that” or “what”.
1. He is telling the police ________ he saw last 
night on the street.
2. Do you like the book ________ I gave you 
yesterday?
3. The girl ________ you saw last night is my little 
cousin.
II. Fill in the blanks with “when”, “before”, “because”, “if” or “though”.
1. You should clean your house carefully ________ the guests arrive.
2. ________ it rains, the football game will be cancelled.
3. He had to leave _________ he wanted to stay.
4. We cannot go on a picnic today ________ the wind is too strong.
5. The young mother saw her baby playing with a new doll ________ she came home.
­143
I. Listen to the passage and fill in the blanks.
There are a few different reasons why people use small talk. The most obvious 
is to break an uncomfortable ________. Another reason, however, is simply to 
________ time. That is why it is so ________ to make small talk when you are 
waiting for something. Some people make small talk in order to be ________. 
You may not feel like ________ with anyone at a party, but it is rude to just sit in 
a corner by yourself. After being ________ to someone new, you probably don’t 
know much about this person. So to show a polite ________, you have to start 
with some small talk.
II. Work in groups. Talk about your opinions on making new friends.
Putting It All Together
I. Read the passage and answer the questions.
It is useful to learn how to make small talk. It is an important social skill. 
It helps to make people feel relaxed and start a conversation when they 
meet for the first time.
The topics for small talk are different in different countries. But usually 
the topics are general rather than personal. In the U.S., people sometimes 
talk about the weather when they make small talk. “It’s a nice day today, 
isn’t it?” This kind of questions helps you begin a conversation because 
1. Why is small talk an important social skill?
    ______________________________________________________________
2. Why is the weather a good topic for small talk?
    ______________________________________________________________
3. What is a good way to make small talk?
    ______________________________________________________________
Listening and Speaking
they are general questions that anyone can 
reply to. 
Next time when you want to make small 
talk, turn a statement into a question. You are 
sure to get an answer and a conversation starter.
­144
Talking about Interpersonal Communication
It’s always better to get things out in the open — talk about a problem, come to a   
solution or move on.                                                                                                       
                                                                                                                                      
I know how to carry on interpersonal communication.
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
II. Interview your classmates about different situations where they started a 
conversation with small talk. Write down their responses.
If I could turn the clock back,
Or erase our terrible fight,
I’d do it in an instant,
And find a way to make it right. 
Sometimes, my friend, we say things, 
That we do not mean to say.
So we had a fight, 
Because of the words I said today.
I remember once, when we were small,
You helped when I was sad.
You stayed and played with me,
In good times and in bad.
And so, my friend, I’m sorry.
When we fight, we never win.
Let’s meet and talk it over,
And let’s be friends again.
My mum says communication,
And talking is the way.
So here’s my hand of friendship.
Will you be my friend today?
I Am Sorry
­145
Lessons 55 ~ 60
Get Ready 
Functions
 Talking about the Future and Giving Wishes
Structures
 What do you want to be when you grow up?
 I think I’d like to be a pilot.
 Though we are going to part, our friendship will 
   always remain.
 I wish you the best in everything you do.
UNIT
10
We Will Learn
for the Future
­146
Lesson 55: Look into the Future
• What do you want to be when you grow up?
• What should you do now if you want to make your dream
   come true?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
In Ms. Cox’s class, the students are working on a group project. They are 
discussing their plans for the future.
Brian: What do you want to be when you grow up, Jenny?
Jenny: I think I’d like to be a pilot. I love to travel, and it would be fun to fly an 
airplane. What do you want to be?
Brian: I want to be a boss and manage a big company. I could make a lot of 
money. 
Jenny: Well, I don’t doubt you would be a good boss, but I don’t think wealth 
is the most important thing in life. We should do things we enjoy. You like 
painting, and you are good at it. 
Brian: That’s true. Perhaps I can be a painter. How about you, Steven?
Steven: Me? I’d like to be a transportation engineer. I would invent things that 
help improve the environment. Maybe I could invent a solar-powered plane.
Kate: That’s a cool idea! I think I would enjoy being a cook. I love cooking, and I 
like creating new dishes myself.
Danny: Great! I’ll go to your restaurant! As for me, I’m going to choose the most 
fun and exciting job in the 
world. I’m going to be an 
astronaut!
Brian: Astronauts need to know 
a lot about science, Danny. 
Science isn’t your best 
subject in school. I think you 
should be a basketball player.
Danny: Hmm… I think I’m 
going to be an astronaut, but 
maybe I can play basketball 
in the spaceship!
­147
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and fill in the blanks.
1
Some students are having a discussion about their future. Jenny wants to be 
a pilot. She loves to ________. Brian wants to be a ________, but Jenny thinks 
Brian should do something that he enjoys. Steven wants to be an ________. 
He wants to invent something that won’t harm the environment. Kate likes 
________ meals and enjoys trying different kinds of food. As for Danny, he is 
going to choose the most fun and ________ job in the world. He is going to be 
an astronaut. 
How many job words can you find? Write them down. 
2
WHAT DO YOU WANT TO BE?
Look at the job words you found above in Activity 2. Think about these 
questions:
• Are some jobs better than other jobs?
• What job do you like best in the list? Why?
• What job do you dislike in the list? Why?
In small groups, organize a list of jobs. Then present your list to the class 
or to another group of students. 
Next, choose a job that you want when you grow up. Choose a job that 
matches your talents and interests. You can choose any job — it doesn’t 
have to be on the list.
Now think! What do you need to do to get this job? How can you get 
ready for it? Make a plan.
PROJECT
t
e
a
c
t
o
r
p
c
s
i
n
g
e
r
w
d
i
t
h
r
i
i
i
o
j
a
u
c
e
o
e
r
e
i
o
s
l
y
d
o
c
t
o
r
r
n
e
a
s
t
r
o
n
a
u
t
t
o
e
k
t
t
c
e
c
e
t
n
u
r
s
e
k
p
e
i
o
h
v
h
e
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
o
r
s
r
e
e
e
d
o
u
f
a
r
m
e
r
a
t
o
r
n
f
e
t
a
i
l
o
r
a
t
p
o
l
i
c
e
h
o
f
f
i
c
e
r
e
e
u
l
b
u
s
i
n
e
s
s
m
a
n
r
a
c
t
r
e
s
s
m
a
r
t
i
s
t
a
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
­148
Lesson 56: Manage Your Time 
• How much time do you spend on your homework every day? 
• Do you think you manage your time well?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Tired Girl, 
Sorry to hear about your trouble. You are such a busy kid!
I think you should take some time to think carefully about your plan. You 
can list all the things you need to do each week in a notebook. Can you do 
all of these things and get enough rest to stay healthy? If not, decide what 
things must be done and what can be dropped from your list.
Here are some other tips that may help you: 
Dear Sue,
I have so many things to do every day. Besides my schoolwork every 
weekday, I go to a chess club twice a week. I often have to help my younger 
cousin. She just started primary school and has some difficulties in maths. 
On top of all that, I have classes in dance, piano, art… I like doing lots of 
different things, but I’m so busy! Yesterday, I fell asleep during class. I was 
so embarrassed!
What should I do? Can you help me?
A Tired Girl 
● Plan your study time for each subject and do a review every weekend. 
● Organize your notes right after classes. 
● Take a few minutes every evening to check 
    how your plan is going.
Making a good plan is half the work itself. 
Best of luck!
Sue
­149
Let’s Do It!
Read the lesson and tick the suggestions mentioned by Sue.
1
 Organize your notes right after classes.
 Make a timetable of all your regular activities.
 Make a list of all the things you need to do each week.
 Plan your study time for each subject.
 Have a few minutes every evening to check how your plan is going.
 Record all the activities you decide to do on a regular basis.
 Do a weekly review of each subject.
Listen to the Tired Girl’s timetable and fill in the table.
3
Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
2
itself      asleep      review      weekday      primary
1. When the class began, the teacher did a quick ________ of the last lesson.
2. After a whole day’s hard work, he fell ________ without eating supper.
3. The dog found ________ lying in the field when it woke up.
4. Slow down! There are some ________ school students ahead.
5. This company holds a short meeting every ________ morning.
Do you have problems managing your time? 
Think about all the things you do and make 
your own timetable.
4
My Timetable
MON.
TUES.
WED.
THUR.
FRI.
SAT.
SUN.
morning
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
Dance
Review
afternoon
Science
Play
Dance
evening
Help my 
cousin
Chess 
Club
Review
Help my 
cousin
Chess 
Club
Help my 
cousin
(CT: Class Time)
­150
Lesson 57: Best Wishes
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
• What will you miss most about junior high school?
• What would you like to say to your best friend when you graduate?
I can’t believe that we’ve 
almost finished junior high. How 
time flies! I’m going to senior 
high now, and I wonder what 
crazy experiments we’ll do there. 
Will I have to wear my raincoat 
in science class again? Best of 
luck, everyone!
— Danny
It’s time to move on to the next level. I’ll never 
forget the time Danny tried to move to the next level… 
by standing on a chair in the classroom. It won’t be 
easy to forget all my friends in Canada. Though we are 
going to part, our friendship will always remain.
— Brian
We laugh, we cry, and 
sometimes we fight. Whatever we 
do in the future, we will always 
have great memories of our time 
together. I’ll miss all of you. Be 
sure to always stay in touch!
— Jenny
Going to senior high 
school is a new start. I’m 
confident that we’ll all do 
very well. I wish you the 
best in everything you do. 
Follow your dreams, my 
friends!
— Kim
We’ve shared so much together over 
our junior high years. I remember the day 
when Brian and I found a wallet in the 
park. We waited there for hours to get it 
back to its owner. I also remember the 
day we rowed boats in the rain. I’ll never 
forget Danny’s Desk-Cycle. Did you 
really think it would work, Danny? Good 
luck with your inventions in the future! 
— Steven 
­151
Everyone has a lot to say at graduation. Read the lesson and 
match the names with the sentences.
1
Let’s Do It!
Listen to more graduation messages and fill in the blanks.
2
Steven 
Jenny
Brian
Danny
Kim
I wish you the best in everything you do.
Best of luck, everyone!
Though we are going to part, our friendship will 
always remain.
Be sure to always stay in touch!
Good luck with your inventions in the future!
How time flies! We enjoyed 
so much together. Remember the 
sports meet? We worked hard 
together, and we won many prizes. 
____________________!
— Mike
I hope we both meet some very 
nice people and make many good 
friends. ____________________!
— Paul
We are going to graduate. We’ve 
been best friends, and I’ll never forget 
your smile. It was the key to opening 
my heart when I was a newcomer. 
____________________!
— Kim
Though we are going to part, 
our friendship will always remain. 
Please let’s not forget each other. 
____________________!	 	
— Lucas
What would you like to say to your classmates? Write it down.
3
­152
Lesson 58: Ms. Liu’s Speech
• How did you do in junior high school? 
• What is your most unforgettable memory from junior high school?
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Good morning. I’m very happy to be here 
today. It is a great honour to be invited to speak 
to you and to wish you well in the future. On my 
way to the hall just now, I stopped by some of 
your classrooms and read the notes you left for 
one another. Some of them made me laugh and 
some almost brought tears to my eyes. All of you 
have some great memories of this period of your 
life, and so do I! 
Time has gone by quickly. Three years have 
already passed. You had valuable experiences in the past and you have bright 
futures ahead of you. I know all of you have your own dreams. Whatever you 
want to be, you need to work hard to achieve it. And I do think you will.
Sometimes life is not easy. At times it can be very hard. No matter how high 
you rise, there will be times when you fall down. When this happens, remember 
this: there is no such thing as true failure. Failure is an opportunity to try 
something new. Pick yourself up and take a new road. Remember to be brave. 
Remember to be your best. And always remember that you have your family and 
friends to support you.
At last, on behalf of all the teachers, I’d like to give our best wishes and 
congratulations to the graduating class!
­153
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. The students are having an English lesson.	
	
	
(      )
2. Some of the notes almost made Ms. Liu cry.	 	
	
(      )
3. Ms. Liu spent two years with this group of students.		
(      )
4. Ms. Liu thinks there is no such thing as true failure.	 	
(      )
Read the lesson again and match each paragraph with its main idea.
2
The words in italics are from this lesson. Tick the correct answers 
to complete the sentences.
3
1. Our English teacher praises us for working hard for the first period, and she 
hopes we will do well next ________, too.
     
 day             	
	
	
 term
2. When running for president, the speech you give is a formal ________.
     
 talk          	
	
	
 article
3. When you achieve your dream, you ________ in doing what you want.
     
 succeed   	
	
	
 failed
4. He is so ________. He brought honour to his family.
     
 stupid	 	
	
	
 brave      
5. Failures can be quite ________ if you look at them in another way.    
     
 helpful		
	
	
 successful
Imagine you will represent all the students in your school. Write a 
speech for the graduating ceremony. 
4
Paragraph 1
Paragraph 2
Paragraph 3
Paragraph 4  
Task tips: Your speech can include your feelings, achievements, progress, 
mistakes you have made in the past three years, and thanks to all the teachers.
Ms. Liu hopes the students will be brave in the 
future. 
Ms. Liu gives the students best wishes and 
congratulations.
Ms. Liu shares some great memories with the 
students.
Ms. Liu encourages the students to work hard to 
achieve their dreams. 
­154
• Do you know any graduation songs? What are they?
• What things do you consider when you have to make an important  
   decision?
Lesson 59: Keep Your Choices Open
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
You want to keep your choices open.
Your education keeps your choices open.
So when you grow up, you can be what you want.
Do well in school, and the decision will be yours!
Dig In
There are certain rules for job words. Look at these words:
• farmer, teacher, singer, reporter, printer, waiter, photographer
• professor, director, actor, tailor
• musician, librarian
• artist, chemist, scientist, dentist, biologist
Can you guess the meaning of “lawyer”, “inventor”, “politician” and 
“specialist”? Can you find more words ending with “er”, “or”, “ian” or “ist”?
Do you want to work in a hospital?
Do you want to be an astronaut?
You may decide to be a professor.
Your education keeps your choices open.
Or maybe a merchant is the job for you.
Do well in school, and the decision will be yours!
You could be a successful farmer.
Your education keeps your choices open.
So when you graduate, you can be what you want.
Do well in school, and the decision will be yours!
­155
Let’s Do It!
1 Listen and tick the statements that are mentioned.
1
 Education keeps your choices open. 
 When you grow up, you can be a merchant. 
 Do well in school, and the decision will be yours. 
 Study hard, and you will do well. 
 You may decide to be a professor. 
 Maybe a police officer is the job for you. 
 You could be a successful cook. 
 You could be a successful farmer.
1 Read the song and tick the meaning that best describes each word.
2
1. professor
    
 a title for a university teacher     
 a title for a high school teacher
2. merchant
    
 a person who works in a store    
 a business person in trade
3. farmer
    
 one who works in a factory        
 one who grows food and raises animals
4. pilot  
    
 a person who flies a plane          
 a person who works in a spaceship
1 Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words or phrases in the box. 
3
1. They have different dishes on the menu. There are so many ____________. 
2. If you want to ____________ school, you must study hard. 
3. She ____________ from high school and went to university last year. 
4. The most ____________ people are those who fail the most, but try the most! 
5. I know that you ____________ to leave here, but please reconsider. 
successful     do well in     choice     decide     graduate
1 Work in groups. Do a survey and find out what your classmates 
want to do in the future. Make a list of possible professions and 
then interview your classmates. 
4
Task tips: 
• What do you want to do/be in the future? 
• Why do you want to be a/an...?
­156
• Have you ever met any famous people? Who?
• What do you think of being an astronaut?
Lesson 60: Get a Good Education
 
 
 
T
H
I
N
K
 
 
A
B
O
U
T
 
 
I
T
Dear Diary, 
Guess what? I met a famous astronaut! I have 
always wanted to be an astronaut. Imagine how 
I felt when I saw Jack Hall in the mall. He was 
the first Canadian astronaut in space, and now, here he was in 
Edmonton!
At first I was nervous, but finally I decided to introduce myself. I 
said hello, and he immediately held out his hand to me. When he 
shook my hand, I almost fainted! I told him that he was my hero 
and that I wanted to be an astronaut someday. He invited me to 
have a cup of tea with him. Can you believe it?
We sat and talked for half an hour. I asked him how he became an 
astronaut. He said that he dreamed of visiting space when he was 
young. To get ready, he studied hard in school. After he graduated 
from university, he became a pilot. Twelve years later, he got a 
job with the Canadian Space Agency. After so many years of hard 
work, his big chance arrived!
I asked him for advice on how to become an astronaut. “Well,” 
he replied, “it’s not easy. You have to get a good education and 
keep your eye on your goal.” Now I see how important it is to do 
well in school. Sometimes I don’t work hard, but in the future, I 
definitely will!
­157
Read the lesson and write true (T) or false (F).
1
Let’s Do It!
1. Danny met Jack Hall in a restaurant.	 	
	
	
	
(      )
2. Danny and Jack Hall had some coffee together.	
	
	
(      )
3. Jack Hall dreamed of visiting space when he was young.	
	
(      )
4. Jack Hall got a job with the Canadian Space Agency.	
	
(      )
5. Jack Hall thinks it is easy to become an astronaut.	
	
	
(      )
This is Danny’s interview with Jack Hall. Read the lesson again 
and answer the questions. Then role-play it.
2
at first      have to      dream of      hold out      graduate from
1. What do you want to be when you ____________ university?
2. ____________, he didn’t agree with me, but later he accepted my idea.
3. My grandpa ____________ becoming a professor when he was a child.
4. I ____________ go to work now. I must prepare for my next speech.
5. He said hello to the visitor and ____________ his hand.
Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box.
3
Work in pairs. What do you think we need to do to make our 
dreams come true? Write your ideas down and share them with 
your classmates.
4
Danny: Why did you want to be an astronaut?
Jack Hall: _____________________________________________                               
Danny: What did you do to get ready?
Jack Hall: _____________________________________________                               
Danny: What job did you get after you graduated from university?
Jack Hall: _____________________________________________                                
Danny: How did you get a chance to go into space?
Jack Hall: _____________________________________________                                
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
­158
Unit Review
Building Your Vocabulary
Grammar in Use
I. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the given words.
1. Both Li Kai and Zhang Li were the ________ (boss) of the company at that 
time.
2. The dog hurt ________ (it) when it ran out of the door.
3. The first thing in ________ (achieve) your goal is getting started.
4. He is very busy. We ________ (doubt) that he will come to the party.
5. I think his suggestion is quite ________ (value).
6. Who is giving a ________ (speak) over there?
II. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box. 
1. ____________________ my group members, thank you very much for all the 
support.
2. If you can ____________________ after you fail, and learn from the 
experience, you’ll be a better person.
3. That movie was really touching. It ____________________.
4. ____________________ the goal and work hard! Your dream will come true.
5. The baby turned over in bed and ____________________ again.
6. He lost his job. ____________________, his leg was hurt in an accident.
This is part of a speech by a student for graduation day. Complete it with the 
correct forms of the given words.
Standing here today, I ________ (fill) with memories of my first school tour. It 
feels like we just ________ (arrive) here yesterday, and now it’s time to leave. 
I remember just after we ________ (begin) high school here three years ago, 
I came to love our school. It ________ (is) my home for the past few years. I 
________ (make) friends here who have brought laughter and joy into my life. 
I have progressed so much. Here I ________ (realize) that there are no limits to 
learning.
fall asleep       pick oneself up       bring tears to one’s eyes
on top of that       keep one’s eye on       on behalf of
­159
Listening and Speaking
I. Listen to the passage and tick the correct answers.
1. What does Bob’s mother do? 
  	
 She is a musician.            
 She is an astronaut.         
 She is a cook.
2. What does Bob look forward to? 
  	
 Becoming a pilot.        	
 Studying music.      	
 Flying into space.
3. Why don’t Bob’s parents agree with him? 
  	
 Because they think Bob won’t be happy.
  	
 Because they think the job is dangerous.
  	
 Because they think Bob isn’t clever enough.
4. Where is Bob studying now? 
  	
 At a music school.       	
 At a space school.    	
 At a middle school.
5. How much does Bob like music?
  	
 Very much.            	
 Just so-so.          	 	
 Not at all.
Putting It All Together
Read the passage and follow the instructions.
When You Grow Up
All children will grow up one day. That is the way it has always been. You, 
too, are growing up. Even as you attend your daily classes, you are growing 
up. ________ But you must not forget that you have responsibilities.
You might not know exactly what you want to be when you grow up. And 
that’s OK. You should try to find out as much as you can about future job 
opportunities. ________
Do you know anyone who could give you some good advice? What about 
your teachers? How about your parents, your uncles or your aunts? If you’d 
like to become a doctor, why don’t you meet with a doctor and discuss what 
it takes to become one? ________ It’s good to be ready for the future.
1.  Fill in the blanks with the sentences below.
A. Discover what you’d like to do when you grow up.
B. You should have fun as you are growing up.
C. You are only in junior high school, but the years go by quickly.
II. Work in groups. Discuss what Bob should do and give him some advice.
­160
Self-Evaluation
Find more examples from this unit. Then mark your stars.
I. Talking about the Future
I’m going to be an astronaut.                  
                                                             
                                                             
I can talk about the future in English.
II. Giving Wishes
I’d like to give our best wishes and            
congratulations to the graduating class!  
                                                             
                                                             
I can give wishes in English. 
When I Grow Up
When I grow up, I’ll be a fireman.
Saving people, that’s what I’ll do.
Honk, honk, the fire engine’s coming.
What do you want to do?
When I grow up, I’ll be a doctor.
I’ll make people better, that’s what I’ll do.
Ding, ding, the doctor is coming.
What do you want to do?
2. Translate the following sentences into Chinese.
a. Even as you attend your daily classes, you are growing up.
    ______________________________________________________________       
b. You might not know exactly what you want to be when you grow up.
    ______________________________________________________________
When I grow up, I’ll be a policeman.
Keeping people safe, that’s what I’ll do.
Honk, honk, the police car’s coming.
What do you want to do?
When I grow up, I’ll be a soccer player.
Helping my team, that’s what I’ll do.
Yeah, yeah, the soccer player’s coming.
What do you want to do?
What do you want to do?
­161
【注】本词汇表中的黑体词为要求掌握的词汇; 其余单词为接触
词汇。
Unit 1
stomach
/ ˈstʌmək / n.  胃;腹部
( 1 )
regret
/ rIˈ􀱹􀱹ret/ v. & n.  惋惜;懊悔
( 1 )
fever / ˈfi∶və / n.  发烧;发热
( 1 )
pale
/ peIl/ adj.  苍白的;浅色的
( 1 )
Sara / ˈs􀱷􀱷∶rə /  莎拉(人名)
( 1 )
examination / I􀱹􀱹ˌzæmIˈneIʃn / n.  检查;
考试
( 1 )
pain / peIn / n.  疼痛
( 1 )
pardon / ˈp􀱷􀱷∶dn / v. & n.  原谅
( 1 )
X-ray / ˈeks reI/ n.  X 光;X 射线
( 1 )
dentist / ˈdentIst/ n.  牙医
( 2 )
refuse / rIˈfju∶z/ v.  拒绝;回绝
( 2 )
toothache
/ ˈtu∶􀱺􀱺eIk / n.  牙痛
( 2 )
rotten
/ ˈrɒtn / adj.  
腐烂的;腐败的
( 2 )
fortunately
/ ˈfɔ∶tʃənətlI/ adv.  
幸运地
( 2 )
headset
/ ˈhedset/ n.  (尤指带麦克风的)
耳机;头戴式受话器
( 2 )
aching
/ ˈeIkI􀱻􀱻/ adj.  
疼痛的
( 2 )
German / ˈdʒɜ∶mən / adj.  德国的
n.  德国人;德语
( 2 )
wolf
/ wʊlf/ n.  狼
( 2 )
grain / 􀱹􀱹reIn / n.  谷物;粮食
( 3 )
vitamin / ˈvItəmIn / n.  维生素
( 3 )
mineral / ˈmInərəl/ n.  矿物质;矿物
( 3 )
fibre / ˈfaIbə / n.  (食物中的)纤维素
( 3 )
corn / kɔ∶n / n.  玉米
( 3 )
protein / ˈprəʊti∶n / n.  蛋白质
( 3 )
bean / bi∶n / n.  豆子
( 3 )
Asian / ˈeIʃn / adj.  亚洲的
n.  亚洲人
( 3 )
soy
/ sɔI/ n.  大豆(作物);大豆食物
( 3 )
calcium / ˈkælsIəm/ n.  钙
( 3 )
bone
/ bəʊn / n.  骨头;骨
( 3 )
yogurt / ˈjɒ􀱹􀱹ət/ n.  酸奶
( 3 )
contain / kənˈteIn / v.  包含
( 3 )
balanced / ˈbælənst/ adj.  均衡的
( 3 )
diet / ˈdaIət/ n.  日常饮食;日常食物
( 3 )
include / Inˈklu∶d / v.  包括;包含
( 3 )
smoke / sməʊk / v.  吸烟
n.  烟
( 4 )
harmful
/ ˈh􀱷􀱷∶mfl/ adj.  
(尤指对健康
或环境)有害的;导致损害的
( 4 )
disease / dIˈzi∶z/ n.  病;疾病
( 4 )
lung / lʌ􀱻􀱻/ n.  肺
( 4 )
harm
/ h􀱷􀱷∶m/ v. & n.  伤害;损害
( 4 )
breathe / bri∶ð/ v.  呼吸
( 4 )
public
/ ˈpʌblIk / adj.  
公共的;大众的( 4 )
law
/ lɔ∶/ n.  法律;法规
( 4 )
cigarette
/ ˌsI􀱹􀱹əˈret/ n.  香烟;卷烟
( 4 )
whenever
/ wenˈevə / conj.  
在任何……
的时候;无论何时
( 4 )
risk
/ rIsk / n.  危险;风险
( 4 )
somebody / ˈsʌmbədI/ pron.  有人;某人( 4 )
damage / ˈdæmIdʒ / v.  损害;损坏
( 5 )
unable / ʌnˈeIbl/ adj.  不能的
( 5 )
dare / deə / v.  敢;敢于;挑战
( 5 )
wheelchair / ˈwi∶ltʃeə / n.  轮椅
( 5 )
control / kənˈtrəʊl/ v.  控制;管理;支配( 5 )
telephone
/ ˈtelIfəʊn / n.  电话;电话机( 5 )
hers / hɜ∶z/ pron.  她的
( 5 )
cheer
/ tʃIə / v.  欢呼;喝彩;加油
n.  欢呼声;喝彩声
( 5 )
kick / kIk / v.  踢
( 5 )
Vocabulary ( I )
Unit 1
­162
n.  杂交植物(动物)
( 9 )
variety / vəˈraIətI/ n.  品种;变化
( 9 )
introduction
/ ˌIntrəˈdʌkʃn / n.  采用;
引进;推行
( 9 )
leader
/ ˈli∶də / n.  领导者;领袖
( 9 )
production
/ prəˈdʌkʃn/ n.  生产,制造
( 9 )
produce / prəˈdju∶s/ v.  生产;出产
( 9 )
super / ˈsju∶pə/ adj.  超级的
( 9 )
planetary
/ ˈplænətrI/ adj.  
行星的
( 10 )
Helen Keller / ˈhelən ˈkelə/  海伦·凯勒
( 10 )
writer / ˈraItə/ n.  作家
( 10 )
educator / ˈedʒʊkeItə/ n.  教育家;教育工作者
disabled / dIsˈeIbld / adj.  肢体有残疾的( 5 )
focus
/ ˈfəʊkəs/ v.  集中;聚集
n.  焦点
( 5 )
pity
/ ˈpItI/ n.  同情,怜悯;遗憾
( 5 )
appendicitis / əˌpendIˈsaItIs/ n.  阑尾炎
( 6 )
appendix / əˈpendIks/ n.  阑尾;附录
( 6 )
sleepy
/ ˈsli∶pI/ adj.  困倦的,瞌睡的
( 6 )
mention
/ ˈmenʃn / v.  提到;写到
(某人或某事)
( 6 )
Unit 2
meaning
/ ˈmi∶nI􀱻􀱻/ n.  意义;意思
( 7 )
dialogue
/ ˈdaIəlɒ􀱹􀱹/ n.  对话;对白
( 7 )
successful
/ səkˈsesfl/ adj.  获得成功的;
有成就的
( 7 )
missing
/ ˈmIsI􀱻􀱻/ adj.  缺少的;丢失的( 7 )
survey
/ səˈveI/ v.  调查
/ ˈsɜ∶veI/ n.  调查
( 7 )
neighbour
/ ˈneIbə / n.  邻居
( 7 )
universe / ˈju∶nIvɜ∶s/ n.  宇宙;万象
( 8 )
Albert Einstein / ˈælbət ˈaInstaIn /  
艾伯特·爱因斯坦
( 8 )
lifetime / ˈlaIftaIm/ n.  一生;终生
( 8 )
solve / sɒlv / v.  解决;解答
( 8 )
theory / ˈ􀱺􀱺IərI/ n.  理论;学说
( 8 )
relativity / ˌreləˈtIvItI/ n.  相对性
( 8 )
Switzerland / ˈswItsələnd /  瑞士
( 8 )
pioneer
/ ˌpaIəˈnIə / n.  先锋;先驱
( 8 )
Nobel / ˈnəʊbel/  诺贝尔(人名)
( 8 )
Princeton / ˈprInstən /  普林斯顿(地名) ( 8 )
nuclear / ˈnju∶klIə / adj.  核能的
( 8 )
weapon / ˈwepən / n.  武器
( 8 )
conclusion / kənˈklu∶ʒn / n.  结论
( 8 )
false / fɔ∶ls/ adj.  错误的;假的
( 8 )
peanut / ˈpi∶nʌt/ n.  花生
( 9 )
hybrid / ˈhaIbrId / adj.  杂交的
produce / prəˈdju∶s/ v.  生产;出产
( 9 )
leader
/ ˈli∶də / n.  领导者;领袖
( 9 )
production
/ prəˈdʌkʃn/ n.  生产,制造
( 9 )
(10)
Unit 2
blind / blaInd/ adj.  失明的;瞎的
( 10 )
deaf / def/ adj.  失聪的;聋的
( 10 )
illness / ˈIlnIs/ n.  疾病
( 10 )
ability
/ əˈbIlItI/ n.  能力
( 10 )
Anne Sullivan
/ æn ˈsʌlIvən/ 安妮·沙利文( 10 )
progress
/ ˈprəʊ􀱹􀱹res/ n.  进步;进展
( 10 )
community
/ kəˈmju∶nItI/ n.  社区;社会
( 10 )
greatly / ˈ􀱹􀱹reItlI/ adv.  非常;很
( 10 )
Norman Bethune / ˈnɔ∶mən beˈ􀱺􀱺ju∶n/  
诺尔曼·白求恩
( 11 )
graduate / ˈ􀱹􀱹rædʒʊeIt/ v.  毕业
( 11 )
Toronto
/ təˈrɒntəʊ/  多伦多(地名)
( 11 )
remain
/ rIˈmeIn/ v.  
仍然是;保持不变
( 11 )
decision
/ dIˈsIʒn/ n.  决定
( 11 )
aid / eId/ n.  帮助;援助
( 11 )
worst
/ wɜ∶st/ adj. & adv.  
(bad 或badly
的最高级)最坏的(地);最糟的(地)
( 11 )
condition
/ kənˈdIʃn/ n.  环境;条件;
状态,状况
( 11 )
operate / ˈɒpəreIt/ v.  动手术,做手术
( 11 )
government
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹ʌvənmənt/ n.  政府
( 11 )
medical
/ ˈmedIkl/ adj.  
医学的;医疗的( 11 )
(11)
(11)
resistance  /rɪ'zɪstəns/  n.    抵抗;反抗
aggression  /ə'gre ʃn/  n.    侵略;侵犯
­163
crossword / ˈkrɒswɜ∶d/ n.  纵横字谜
( 12 )
puzzle / ˈpʌzl/ n.  谜;智力游戏
( 12 )
based / beIst/ adj.  (以……)为基础,
(以……)为根据
( 12 )
whom / hu∶m/ pron.  (用作动词或介词
的宾语)谁
( 12 )
anybody / ˈenIbɒdI/ pron.  任何人
( 12 )
chemistry
/ ˈkemIstrI/ n.  化学
( 12 )
Unit 3
safety / ˈseIftI/ n.  安全;平安
( 13 )
careful / ˈkeəfl/ adj.  小心的;仔细的
( 13 )
decorate / ˈdekəreIt/ v.  装饰
( 13 )
hang
/ hæ􀱻􀱻/ v.  (hung / hung)悬挂;垂下
( 13 )
ceiling / ˈsi∶lI􀱻􀱻/ n.  天花板
( 13 )
lie
/ laI/ v.  (lay / lain)平躺;躺
v.  (lied / lied)说谎
n.  谎言,谎话
( 13 )
serious / ˈsIərIəs/ adj.  严重的;严肃的
( 13 )
ambulance / ˈæmbjʊləns/ n.  救护车
( 13 )
necessary
/ ˈnesIsərI/ adj.  
必需的
( 13 )
accident / ˈæksIdənt/ n.  事故;意外
( 14 )
town / taʊn / n.  城镇
( 14 )
Alberta
/ ælˈbɜ∶tə /  阿尔伯塔(地名)
( 14 )
James
/ dʒeImz/  詹姆斯(人名)
( 14 )
reporter / rIˈpɔ∶tə / n.  记者
( 14 )
roll / rəʊl/ v.  滚动;(使)翻滚
( 14 )
Andrews / ˈændru∶s/  安德鲁斯(姓氏)
( 14 )
fault / fɔ∶lt/ n.  缺点;过错
( 14 )
icy / ˈaIsI/ adj.  结满冰的
( 14 )
ugly
/ ˈʌ􀱹􀱹lI/ adj.  
丑陋的;难看的
( 14 )
shoulder
/ ˈʃəʊldə / n.  肩;肩膀
( 14 )
wound
/ wu∶nd / n.  伤;伤口
( 14 )
recover / rIˈkʌvə / v.  恢复
( 14 )
expect
/ Ikˈspekt/ v.  期待;盼望
( 14 )
helmet
/ ˈhelmIt/ n.  头盔;防护帽
( 15 )
sudden
/ ˈsʌdn / n. & adj.  突然(的)
( 15 )
wham
/ wæm/ onom.  (突然的重击声)
砰;嘭
( 15 )
blood / blʌd / n.  血
( 15 )
knee
/ ni∶/ n.  膝;膝盖;膝关节
( 15 )
bleed
/ bli∶d / v.  
流血;失血
( 15 )
sharp
/ ʃ􀱷􀱷∶p / adj.  
锋利的;锐利的
( 15 )
rock
/ rɒk / n.  碎石;岩石
( 15 )
stick
/ stIk / v.  (stuck/ stuck)插入;穿入( 15 )
scary
/ ˈskeərI/ adj.  
恐怖的;吓人的
( 15 )
goodness
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹ʊdnəs/ n.  善良;美德
( 15 )
stranger
/ ˈstreIndʒə / n.  
陌生人
( 15 )
careless / ˈkeəlIs/ adj.  粗心的
( 15 )
prevent / prIˈvent/ v.  阻止;预防
( 16 )
certain / ˈsз∶tn / adj.  某些;某个
( 16 )
themselves / ðəmˈselvz/ pron.  他(她、它)
们自己
( 16 )
baking
/ ˈbeIkI􀱻􀱻/ n.  烘焙
( 16 )
soda / ˈsəʊdə / n.  苏打
( 16 )
salt / sɔ∶lt/ n.  食盐
( 16 )
scissors
/ ˈsIzəs/ n.  剪刀
( 16 )
knife
/ naIf/ n.  刀
( 16 )
poison / ˈpɔIzn / n.  毒药;毒物
( 16 )
heat / hi∶t/ n.  高温;热;炉灶
v.  加热
( 16 )
burn / bз∶n / v. (burned / burned 或burnt/ burnt)
  烧伤;烫伤;燃烧
( 16 )
bathtub
/ ˈb􀱷􀱷∶􀱺􀱺tʌb / n.  浴缸;浴盆
( 16 )
slip / slIp / v.  滑倒
( 16 )
earthquake
/ ˈɜ∶􀱺􀱺kweIk / n.  地震
( 17 )
calm
/ k􀱷􀱷∶m/ adj.  
镇静的;沉着的
( 17 )
object / ˈɒbdʒIkt/ n.  物体;对象;目标
( 17 )
system
/ ˈsIstəm/ n.  系统
( 17 )
survival
/ səˈvaIvəl/ n.  生存;存活;幸存( 17 )
rule / ru∶l/ n.  规则;规章
( 18 )
Unit 3
­164
branch / bræntʃ / n.  树枝
( 18 )
training
/ ˈtreInI􀱻􀱻/ n.  训练;培养
( 18 )
Unit 4
compare
/ kəmˈpeə / v.  比较
( 19 )
passage
/ ˈpæsIdʒ / n.  章节;段落
( 19 )
limit
/ ˈlImIt/ v.  
限制;限定
( 19 )
format
/ ˈfɔ∶mæt/ n.  格式;版式
( 19 )
rhyme
/ raIm/ n.  韵;韵脚
v.  押韵
( 19 )
although / ɔ∶lˈðəʊ/ conj.  虽然,尽管;不过,
然而
( 19 )
effort
/ ˈefət/ n.  精力;努力
( 19 )
fat / fæt/ adj.  胖的;厚的
n.  脂肪;肥肉
( 19 )
aloud
/ əˈlaʊd / adv.  
出声地;大声地
( 19 )
line
/ laIn / n.  (诗)行;路线
( 20 )
text
/ tekst/ n.  
正文;文字材料
( 20 )
poet
/ ˈpəʊIt/ n.  诗人
( 20 )
single
/ ˈsI􀱻􀱻􀱹􀱹l/ adj.  单一的;单独的
( 20 )
screen / skri∶n / n.  屏幕;荧光屏
( 20 )
hum
/ hʌm/ v.  发嗡嗡声
( 20 )
stretch
/ stretʃ/ v.  伸展
( 20 )
liquid / ˈlIkwId / adj.  清澈的;晶莹的
n.  液体
( 20 )
state / steIt/ v.  陈述;说明
( 20 )
noun
/ naʊn / n.  名词
( 20 )
adjective
/ ˈædʒIktIv / n.  形容词
( 20 )
express
/ Ikˈspres/ v.  表达
( 20 )
fable
/ ˈfeIbl/ n.  寓言
( 21 )
woodcutter
/ ˈwʊdkʌtə / n.  伐木工
( 21 )
axe
/ æks/ n.  斧子
( 21 )
dive / daIv / v.  (dived 或dove / dived)
跳水;俯冲
( 21 )
admit
/ ədˈmIt/ v.  
承认;赞同
( 21 )
silver / ˈsIlvə / adj. & n.  银(的)
( 21 )
policy / ˈpɒləsI/ n.  原则;政策
( 21 )
loud
/ laʊd / adj.  
大声的;喧哗的
( 22 )
frightened / ˈfraItnd / adj.  惊吓的;受惊的;
害怕的
( 22 )
board
/ bɔ∶d / n.  板;木板
( 22 )
awake
/ əˈweIk / adj.  醒着的
( 22 )
musician
/ mju∶ˈzIʃən / n.  音乐家;乐师( 22 )
perhaps
/ pəˈhæps/ adv.  也许;可能
( 22 )
peek / pi∶k / v.  偷看;窥视
( 23 )
softly
/ ˈsɒftlI/ adv.  
轻轻地
( 23 )
scene
/ si∶n / n.  场景;景色;风景
( 23 )
crawl
/ krɔ∶l/ v.  爬行;匍匐行进
( 23 )
selfish
/ ˈselfIʃ / adj.  
自私的
( 23 )
knock
/ nɒk / v.  敲;敲打;碰撞
( 23 )
spread
/ spred / v.  
(spread / spread)
张开;扩展
( 23 )
neck
/ nek / n.  颈;脖子
( 23 )
wicked
/ ˈwIkId / adj.  
邪恶的
( 23 )
fairy
/ ˈfeərI/ n.  仙子;小精灵
( 24 )
tale
/ teIl/ n.  故事;童话
( 24 )
character
/ ˈkærəktə / n.  (小说、戏剧当
中的)人物;特点;特色
( 24 )
plot
/ plɒt/ n.  情节
( 24 )
humorous / ˈhju∶mərəs/ adj.  幽默的;
诙谐的
( 24 )
Unit 5
experiment / IkˈsperImənt/ n.  实验;试验
( 25 )
jar / dʒ􀱷􀱷∶/ n.  广口瓶;罐子
( 25 )
upside / ˈʌpsaId / n.  上部;上边
( 25 )
pour / pɔ∶/ v.  倒出;倾倒
( 25 )
correct
/ kəˈrekt/ adj.  
正确的;恰当的( 25 )
scientific / ˌsaIənˈtIfIk / adj.  科学的
( 25 )
method
/ ˈme􀱺􀱺əd / n.  方法;办法
( 25 )
raincoat
/ ˈreInkəʊt/ n.  雨衣
( 25 )
force / fɔ∶s/ n.  力量
v.  迫使;强迫
( 25 )
Unit 4
Unit 5
­165
pressure / ˈpreʃə / n.  压力,压强;挤压
( 25 )
conclude / kənˈklu∶d / v.  得出结论;断定( 25 )
holder
/ ˈhəʊldə / n.  
支托物;持有者
( 26 )
shallow / ˈʃæləʊ/ adj.  浅的
( 26 )
lighter
/ ˈlaItə / n.  打火机;点火器
( 26 )
match
/ mætʃ/ n.  火柴
v.  相称;相配
( 26 )
examine / I􀱹􀱹ˈzæmIn / v.  检查
( 26 )
oxygen / ˈɒksIdʒən / n.  氧气
( 26 )
telescope
/ ˈtelIskəʊp / n.  望远镜
( 27 )
solar
/ ˈsəʊlə / adj.  太阳的;关于太阳的( 27 )
certainly
/ ˈsɜ∶tnlI/ adv.  当然;确定
( 27 )
unless
/ ənˈles/ conj.  除非;如果不
( 27 )
double
/ ˈdʌbl/ n. & adj. & adv.  两倍(的);
双倍(的)
( 27 )
mystery
/ ˈmIstərI/ n.  神秘事物;奥秘
( 27 )
Chip Taylor
/ tʃIp ˈteIlə /  奇普·泰勒
( 28 )
biology
/ baIˈɒlədʒI/ n.  生物学;生物
( 28 )
butterfly
/ ˈbʌtəflaI/ n.  蝴蝶
( 28 )
migrate
/ ˈmaI􀱹􀱹reIt/ v.  移居;迁徙
( 28 )
fantastic / fænˈtæstIk / adj.  奇异的;
了不起的;极好的
( 28 )
completely
/ kəmˈpli∶tlI/ adv.  完全地
( 28 )
grandchild
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹ræntʃaIld / n.  
孙子;孙女;
外孙;外孙女
( 28 )
female
/ ˈfi∶meIl/ n.  雌性的动物或植物;
女子
( 28 )
milkweed
/ ˈmIlkˈwi∶d / n.  (植)马利筋( 28 )
chemical
/ ˈkemIkl/ n.  化学物质
( 28 )
puzzling
/ ˈpʌzlI􀱻􀱻/ adj.  令人费解的
( 28 )
DNA  脱氧核糖核酸
( 29 )
blueprint
/ ˈblu∶prInt/ n.  蓝图
( 29 )
general
/ ˈdʒenərəl/ adj.  一般的;普遍的
( 29 )
complex
/ ˈkɒmpleks/ adj.  
复杂的
( 29 )
twin
/ twIn / n.  双胞胎之一
( 29 )
repeat
/ rIˈpi∶t/ v.  重复;复述;背诵
( 29 )
pattern
/ ˈpætn / n.  模式;形式
( 29 )
identify
/ aIˈdentIfaI/ v.  确认;鉴别
( 29 )
related
/ rIˈleItId / adj.  
有关的;相关的( 29 )
grandson
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹rænsʌn / n.  
孙子;外孙
( 29 )
granddaughter
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹rændɔ∶tə / n.  
孙女;
外孙女
( 29 )
instruction / Inˈstrʌkʃn / n.  指示;说明
( 29 )
affect
/ əˈfekt/ v.  
影响
( 30 )
suggest
/ səˈdʒest/ v.  
建议,提议;暗示( 30 )
development
/ dIˈveləpmənt/ n.  发展
( 30 )
mobile phone
/ ˌməʊbaIlˈfəʊn / n.
移动电话
( 30 )
discovery
/ dIsˈkʌvərI/ n.  发现;发觉
( 30 )
Unit 6
involve
/ Inˈvɒlv / v.  (使)参加;包含
( 31 )
script
/ skrIpt/ n.  
剧本
( 31 )
director
/ dIˈrektə / n.  导演;院长;校长;
主任;负责人
( 31 )
direct
/ dIˈrekt/ v.  
导演;指导;指示
( 31 )
costume
/ ˈkɒstju∶m/ n.  服装;戏装
( 31 )
background
/ ˈbæk􀱹􀱹raʊnd / n.  
背景;
 背景资料
( 31 )
task
/ t􀱷􀱷∶sk / n.  任务;工作
( 31 )
effect
/ Iˈfekt/ n.  
影响;效果
( 32 )
France / fr􀱷􀱷∶ns;fræns/  法国
( 32 )
couple
/ ˈkʌpl/ n.  几个人(事物);
两个人(事物)
( 32 )
titanic
/ taIˈtænIk / adj.  巨大的;
(Titanic)泰坦尼克号
( 32 )
action
/ ˈækʃn / n.  行动;活动;作用
( 32 )
Bruce Lee
/ bru∶s li∶/  李小龙(功夫明星)
( 32 )
prefer
/ prIˈfɜ∶/ v.  更喜欢
( 32 )
fiction
/ ˈfIkʃn / n.  
小说;虚构;编造
( 32 )
Unit 6
­166
comedy
/ ˈkɒmIdI/ n.  喜剧
( 32 )
Charlie Chaplin
/ ˈtʃ􀱷􀱷∶lI ˈtʃæplIn /  
查理·卓别林
( 32 )
popcorn
/ ˈpɒpkɔ∶n / n.  爆米花
( 32 )
goldfish
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹əʊldfIʃ / n.  
金鱼
( 33 )
wife
/ waIf/ n.  
妻子
( 33 )
net
/ net/ n.  网;网络
( 33 )
whatever / wɒtˈevə / pron.  无论什么;
  不管什么;任何(每样)事物
( 33 )
grey
/ 􀱹􀱹reI/ adj. & n.  
灰色(的)
( 33 )
marry
/ ˈmærI/ v.  结婚;嫁;娶
( 33 )
ours
/ ˈaʊəz/ pron.  我们的
( 33 )
coast / kəʊst/ n.  海岸;海滨
( 34 )
handbag / ˈhændbæ􀱹􀱹/ n.  手提包
( 34 )
among / əˈmʌ􀱻􀱻/ prep.  在……中间;被……
所围绕
( 34 )
servant
/ ˈsɜ∶vənt/ n.  
仆人;雇工
( 34 )
guard
/ 􀱹􀱹􀱷􀱷∶d / n.  
卫兵;看守
( 34 )
queen / kwi∶n / n.  女王;王后
( 34 )
serve
/ sɜ∶v/ v.  为……服务
( 34 )
mad / mæd / adj.  疯的;发怒的
( 34 )
crash
/ kræʃ / v.  撞击;坠落
( 34 )
handsome
/ ˈhænsəm/ adj.  好看的;英俊的
( 35 )
playwright
/ ˈpleIraIt/ n.  剧作家
( 35 )
William Shakespeare
/ ˈwIljəm ˈʃeIkspIə /
威廉·莎士比亚(英国诗人、作家)
( 35 )
Hamlet
/ ˈhæmlIt/   哈姆雷特(莎士
比亚悲剧剧名及该剧的主人公)
( 35 )
tragedy
/ ˈtrædʒIdI/ n.  悲剧
( 35 )
teahouse
/ ˈti∶haʊs/ n.  
茶馆
( 35 )
actress
/ ˈæktrIs/ n.  
女演员
( 36 )
Unit 7
victory / ˈvIktərI/ n.  胜利
( 37 )
beat / bi∶t/ v.  (beat/ beaten)击败;胜过;打
( 37 )
repair / rIˈpeə / v.  修理;修补
( 37 )
service
/ ˈsɜ∶vIs/ n.  
服务
( 37 )
message
/ ˈmesIdʒ / n.  信息;消息
( 37 )
check
/ tʃek / v.  
检查;检验
( 37 )
secretary
/ ˈsekrətrI/ n.  秘书;干事
( 37 )
bounce / baʊns/ v.  (球)弹起
( 37 )
ouch
/ aʊtʃ / onom.  (表示突然的疼痛)
哎呦
( 37 )
separate
/ ˈsepəreIt/ v.  
(使)分开,分离
( 37 )
behave
/ bIˈheIv / v.  表现
( 37 )
gentleman
/ ˈdʒentlmən / n.  (pl. gentlemen)
绅士;君子
( 37 )
Danielle
/ dænˈjel/  丹妮尔(人名)
( 38 )
president
/ ˈprezIdənt/ n.  会长;总统;
国家主席;董事长
( 38 )
council
/ ˈkaʊnsl/ n.  委员会;议会
( 38 )
organization
/ ˌɔ∶􀱹􀱹ənaIˈzeIʃn / n.  组织;机构
( 38 )
provide
/ prəˈvaId / v.  提供;供给
( 38 )
agreement
/ əˈ􀱹􀱹ri∶mənt/ n.  协议;同意( 38 )
religion
/ rIˈlIdʒən / n.  宗教
( 38 )
dispute
/ dIˈspju∶t/ n. & v.  争论;辩论
( 38 )
lock
/ lɒk / v.  (用锁)锁上;被锁上
n.  锁
( 39 )
interaction
/ ˌIntərˈækʃn / n.  一起活动;合作
( 39 )
upset
/ ˌʌpˈset/ v.  使(某人)苦恼或心烦
( 39 )
argument
/ ˈ􀱷􀱷∶􀱹􀱹jʊmənt/ n.  争论;争辩;争吵
( 39 )
asleep
/ əˈsli∶p / adj.  睡着的
( 39 )
lower
/ ˈləʊə / v.  使(某事物)减少
( 39 )
volume
/ ˈvɒlju∶m/ n.  音量;响度
( 39 )
option
/ ˈɒpʃn / n.  选择
( 39 )
mutual
/ ˈmju∶tʃʊəl/ adj.  相互的
( 39 )
Unit 7
­167
distant
/ ˈdIstənt/ adj.  遥远的
( 39 )
snake
/ sneIk / n.  蛇
( 39 )
suffer
/ ˈsʌfə / v.  受苦,受难
( 40 )
headquarters / ˌhedˈkwɔ∶təz/ n.  总部
( 40 )
security / sIˈkjʊərətI/ n.  安全;保证
( 40 )
permanent
/ ˈpɜ∶mənənt/ adj.  
永久的
( 40 )
situation / ˌsItʃʊˈeIʃn / n.  状况;形势
( 40 )
satisfy
/ ˈsætIsfaI/ v.  
使满意;使满足
( 40 )
forever
/ fərˈevə / adv.  永远
( 40 )
silence
/ ˈsaIləns/ n.  沉默;无声状态
( 41 )
silent
/ ˈsaIlənt/ adj.  沉默的;寂静的
( 41 )
elder / ˈeldə / n.  老人;长辈
( 41 )
directly
/ dIˈrektlI/ adv.  
直接地
( 41 )
rather / ˈr􀱷􀱷∶ðə / adv.  相当;宁可
( 42 )
peacemaker
/ ˈpi∶sˌmeIkə / n.  调解人
( 42 )
Unit 8
Chinatown
/ ˈtʃaInətaʊn / n.  唐人街;
中国城
( 43 )
decoration
/ ˌdekəˈreIʃn / n.  
装饰品
( 43 )
bowl
/ bəʊl/ n.  
碗
( 43 )
chopstick
/ ˈtʃɒpstIk / n.  
筷子
(一般用复数)
( 43 )
spoon / spu∶n / n.  匙勺
( 43 )
fork
/ fɔ∶k / n.  叉子
( 43 )
underground
/ ˈʌndə􀱹􀱹raʊnd / adj.
地下的
( 43 )
lantern
/ ˈlæntən / n.  灯笼
( 43 )
dragon
/ ˈdræ􀱹􀱹ən / n.  
龙
( 43 )
Santa Claus
/ ˈsæntə klɔ∶z/  圣诞老人
( 43 )
temple
/ ˈtempl/ n.  庙宇
( 43 )
society
/ səˈsaIətI/ n.  社会
( 44 )
generation
/ ˌdʒenəˈreIʃn / n.  
一代(人) ( 44 )
wealthy
/ ˈwel􀱺􀱺I/ adj.  
富有的;富裕的
( 44 )
penny
/ ˈpenI/ n.  便士
( 44 )
pound
/ paʊnd / n.  镑;磅
( 44 )
foolish
/ ˈfu∶lIʃ / adj.  愚蠢的;傻的
( 44 )
whether / ˈweðə / conj.  是否;不管;无论( 44 )
human / ˈhju∶mən / n. & adj.  人(的);
人类(的)
( 44 )
manners
/ ˈmænəs/ n.  礼仪;习俗;礼貌( 45 )
though
/ ðəʊ/ conj.  虽然;尽管;即使;
然而
( 45 )
modest
/ ˈmɒdIst/ adj.  
谦虚的;谦恭的( 45 )
virtue
/ ˈvɜ∶tʃu∶/ n.  
美德
( 45 )
praise
/ preIz/ v. & n.  称赞;赞扬
( 45 )
private
/ ˈpraIvət/ adj. 私人的;私有的
( 45 )
elderly
/ ˈeldəlI/ adj.  上了年纪的;较老的
( 45 )
guest / 􀱹􀱹est/ n.  客人
( 45 )
extra
/ ˈekstrə / adj.  
额外的;另外的
( 45 )
waiter
/ ˈweItə / n.  
(餐馆的)男服务员( 45 )
tip
/ tIp / v.  
给小费
( 45 )
percent / pəˈsent/ n.
百分之……
( 46 )
central
/ ˈsentrəl/ adj.  
中部的;中间的( 46 )
immigrant
/ ˈImI􀱹􀱹rənt/ n.  移民
( 46 )
according to
/ əˈkɔ∶dI􀱻􀱻tə / prep.  根据;
依照
( 46 )
official
/ əˈfIʃəl/ adj.  
官方的;正式的
( 46 )
custom
/ ˈkʌstəm/ n.  习惯;习俗;风俗
( 46 )
tidy
/ ˈtaIdI/ v.  使整洁;使整齐;整理
adj.  整洁的;整齐的
( 47 )
Russian / ˈrʌʃn / adj.  俄罗斯的
n.  俄罗斯人;俄语
( 47 )
noisy
/ ˈnɔIzI/ adj.  喧闹的;吵闹的
( 47 )
chalk
/ tʃɔ∶k / n.  粉笔
( 48 )
tradition
/ trəˈdIʃn / n.  传统
( 48 )
reaction
/ rIˈækʃn / n.  
反应
( 48 )
react
/ rIˈækt/ v.  
反应
( 48 )
officer
/ ˈɒfIsə / n.  政府官员
( 48 )
gun
/ 􀱹􀱹ʌn / n.  枪
( 48 )
doll
/ dɒl/ n.  洋娃娃;玩偶
( 48 )
Unit 8
­168
Unit 9
unit
/ ˈju∶nIt/ n.  单元;单位
( 49 )
misunderstanding
/ ˌmIsʌndəˈstændI􀱻􀱻/ n.
误解
( 49 )
require
/ rIˈkwaIə / v.  需要
( 49 )
communication
/ kəˌmju∶nIˈkeIʃn / n.
交流;沟通
( 49 )
hardly
/ ˈh􀱷􀱷∶dlI/ adv. 几乎不;几乎没有( 49 )
solution
/ səˈlu∶ʃn / n.  解决办法;答案
( 49 )
anger
/ ˈæ􀱻􀱻􀱹􀱹ə / n.  怒;怒火;怒气
( 49 )
interpersonal
/ ˌIntəˈpɜ∶sənl/ adj.  人际的;
人际关系的
( 50 )
passport
/ ˈp􀱷􀱷∶spɔ∶t/ n. 途径,手段;护照( 50 )
proper
/ ˈprɒpə / adj.  
正确的;恰当的( 50 )
listener
/ ˈlIsnə / n.  听者
( 50 )
contact / ˈkɒntækt/ n. & v.  接触;联系
( 50 )
promise
/ ˈprɒmIs/ n.  承诺;许诺
( 50 )
cancel
/ ˈkænsəl/ v.  
取消
( 50 )
figure
/ ˈfI􀱹􀱹ə / v.  
计算;认为
( 51 )
difficulty
/ ˈdIfIkəltI/ n.  困难
( 52 )
dining
/ ˈdaInI􀱻􀱻/ n.  用餐
( 52 )
simply
/ ˈsImplI/ adv.  只是
( 52 )
somehow
/ ˈsʌmhaʊ/ adv.  以某种方式
(或方法)
( 52 )
adapt
/ əˈdæpt/ v.  
使适应;改编
( 52 )
universal
/ ˌju∶nIˈvɜ∶sl/ adj.  通用的;
全世界的;普遍的
( 52 )
absent
/ ˈæbsənt/ adj.  缺席的;不在的( 53 )
trouble
/ ˈtrʌbl/ n.  麻烦;困难
( 53 )
secret
/ ˈsi∶krIt/ n. & adj.  秘密(的)
( 53 )
moment
/ ˈməʊmənt/ n.  片刻;瞬间
( 54 )
tap
/ tæp / v.  轻拍;轻敲
( 54 )
familiar
/ fəˈmIljə / adj.  
熟悉的;
常见到的
( 54 )
Unit 10
boss
/ bɒs/ n.  老板
( 55 )
manage
/ ˈmænIdʒ / v.  
管理;负责
( 55 )
doubt
/ daʊt/ v.  怀疑
( 55 )
wealth
/ wel􀱺􀱺/ n.  钱财;财富
( 55 )
astronaut / ˈæstrənɔ∶t/ n.  宇航员
( 55 )
besides / bIˈsaIdz/ prep.  除……之外(还) ( 56 )
weekday
/ ˈwi∶kdeI/ n.  工作日(星期一
 至星期五的任何一天)
( 56 )
primary
/ ˈpraImərI/ adj.  小学的;基本的
( 56 )
notebook
/ ˈnəʊtbʊk / n.  笔记本
( 56 )
review
/ rIˈvju∶/ n.  复习;回顾;评论
v.  
回顾;反思;评论
( 56 )
itself / Itˈself/ pron.  它本身(自己)
( 56 )
wallet / ˈwɒlIt/ n.  钱包
( 57 )
owner / ˈəʊnə / n.  主人
( 57 )
row / rəʊ/ v.  划(船)
( 57 )
senior
/ ˈsi∶niə / adj.  级别高的
( 57 )
speech
/ spi∶tʃ / n.  发言;演讲
( 58 )
period
/ ˈpIərIəd / n.  时期,一段时间;
节;学时
( 58 )
valuable
/ ˈvæljʊəbl/ adj.  宝贵的
( 58 )
achieve
/ əˈtʃi∶v / v.  做成;获得
( 58 )
behalf
/ bIˈh􀱷􀱷∶f/ n.  代表(或代替)某人( 58 )
congratulation
/ kənˌ􀱹􀱹rætʃʊˈleIʃən / n.
祝贺;恭祝;贺词
( 58 )
merchant
/ ˈmɜ∶tʃənt/ n.  商人
( 59 )
mall
/ mɔ∶l/ n.  商场
( 60 )
faint
/ feInt/ v.  昏倒
( 60 )
agency
/ ˈeIdʒənsI/ n.  机关;代理机构( 60 )
definitely
/ ˈdefInətlI/ adv.  肯定
( 60 )
Unit 10
Unit 9
­169
appendicitis / əˌpendIˈsaItIs/ n.  阑尾炎
( 6 )
appendix / əˈpendIks/ n.  阑尾;附录
( 6 )
argument
/ ˈ􀱷􀱷∶􀱹􀱹jʊmənt/ n.  争论;争辩;争吵
( 39 )
Asian / ˈeIʃn / adj.  亚洲的
n.  亚洲人
( 3 )
asleep
/ əˈsli∶p / adj.  睡着的
( 39 )
astronaut / ˈæstrənɔ∶t/ n.  宇航员
( 55 )
awake
/ əˈweIk / adj.  醒着的
( 22 )
axe
/ æks/ n.  斧子
( 21 )
B
background
/ ˈbæk􀱹􀱹raʊnd / n.  
背景;
背景资料
( 31 )
baking
/ ˈbeIkI􀱻􀱻/ n.  烘焙
( 16 )
balanced / ˈbælənst/ adj.  均衡的
( 3 )
based / beIst/ adj.  (以……)为基础,
(以……)为根据
( 12 )
bathtub
/ ˈb􀱷􀱷∶􀱺􀱺tʌb / n.  浴缸;浴盆
( 16 )
bean / bi∶n / n.  豆子
( 3 )
beat / bi∶t/ v.  (beat/ beaten)击败;胜过;
打
( 37 )
behalf
/ bIˈh􀱷􀱷∶f/ n.  代表(或代替)某人( 58 )
behave
/ bIˈheIv / v.  表现
( 37 )
besides / bIˈsaIdz/ prep.  除……之外(还)
( 56 )
biology
/ baIˈɒlədʒI/ n.  生物学;生物
( 28 )
bleed
/ bli∶d / v.  
流血;失血
( 15 )
blind / blaInd / adj.  失明的;瞎的
( 10 )
blood / blʌd / n.  血
( 15 )
blueprint
/ ˈblu∶prInt/ n.  蓝图
( 29 )
board
/ bɔ∶d / n.  板;木板
( 22 )
bone
/ bəʊn / n.  骨头;骨
( 3 )
boss
/ bɒs/ n.  老板
( 55 )
Vocabulary ( II )
B
【注】本词汇表中的黑体词为要求掌握的词汇; 其余单词为接触
词汇。
A
ability
/ əˈbIlItI/ n.  能力
( 10 )
absent
/ ˈæbsənt/ adj.  缺席的;不在的( 53 )
accident / ˈæksIdənt/ n.  事故;意外
( 14 )
according to
/ əˈkɔ∶dI􀱻􀱻tə / prep.  根据;
依照
( 46 )
achieve
/ əˈtʃi∶v/ v.  做成;获得
( 58 )
aching
/ ˈeIkI􀱻􀱻/ adj.  
疼痛的
( 2 )
action
/ ˈækʃn / n.  行动;活动;作用
( 32 )
actress
/ ˈæktrIs/ n.  
女演员
( 36 )
adapt
/ əˈdæpt/ v.  
使适应;改编
( 52 )
adjective
/ ˈædʒIktIv / n.  形容词
( 20 )
admit
/ ədˈmIt/ v.  
承认;赞同
( 21 )
affect
/ əˈfekt/ v.  
影响
( 30 )
agency
/ ˈeIdʒənsI/ n.  机关;代理机构( 60 )
A
(11)
aggression  /ə'gre ʃn/  n.    侵略;侵犯
agreement
/ əˈ􀱹􀱹ri∶mənt/ n.  协议;同意( 38 )
aid / eId / n.  帮助;援助
( 11 )
Albert Einstein / ˈælbət ˈaInstaIn /
艾伯特·爱因斯坦
( 8 )
Alberta
/ ælˈbɜ∶tə /  阿尔伯塔(地名)
( 14 )
aloud
/ əˈlaʊd / adv.  
出声地;大声地
( 19 )
although / ɔ∶lˈðəʊ/ conj.  虽然,尽管;
不过,然而
( 19 )
ambulance / ˈæmbjʊləns/ n.  救护车
( 13 )
among / əˈmʌ􀱻􀱻/ prep.  在……中间;
被……所围绕
( 34 )
Andrews / ˈændru∶s/  安德鲁斯(姓氏)
( 14 )
anger
/ ˈæ􀱻􀱻􀱹􀱹ə / n.  怒;怒火;怒气
( 49 )
Anne Sullivan
/ æn ˈsʌlIvən /  安妮·沙利文
( 10 )
anybody / ˈenIbɒdI/ pron.  任何人
( 12 )
­170
bounce / baʊns/ v.  (球)弹起
( 37 )
bowl
/ bəʊl/ n.  
碗
( 43 )
branch / bræntʃ / n.  树枝
( 18 )
breathe / bri∶ð/ v.  呼吸
( 4 )
Bruce Lee
/ bru∶s li∶/  李小龙(功夫明星)
( 32 )
burn / bз∶n / v. (burned / burned 或burnt/ burnt)
  烧伤;烫伤;燃烧
( 16 )
butterfly
/ ˈbʌtəflaI/ n.  蝴蝶
( 28 )
C
calcium / ˈkælsIəm/ n.  钙
( 3 )
calm
/ k􀱷􀱷∶m/ adj.  
镇静的;沉着的
( 17 )
cancel
/ ˈkænsəl/ v.  
取消
( 50 )
careful / ˈkeəfl/ adj.  小心的;仔细的
( 13 )
careless / ˈkeəlIs/ adj.  粗心的
( 15 )
ceiling / ˈsi∶lI􀱻􀱻/ n.  天花板
( 13 )
central
/ ˈsentrəl/ adj.  
中部的;中间的( 46 )
certain / ˈsз∶tn / adj.  某些;某个
( 16 )
certainly
/ ˈsɜ∶tnlI/ adv.  当然;确定
( 27 )
chalk
/ tʃɔ∶k / n.  粉笔
( 48 )
character
/ ˈkærəktə / n.  (小说、戏剧
当中的)人物;特点;特色
( 24 )
Charlie Chaplin
/ ˈtʃ􀱷􀱷∶lI ˈtʃæplIn /
查理·卓别林
( 32 )
check
/ tʃek / v.  
检查;检验
( 37 )
cheer
/ tʃIə / v.  欢呼;喝彩;加油
n.  欢呼声;喝彩声
( 5 )
chemical
/ ˈkemIkl/ n.  化学物质
( 28 )
chemistry
/ ˈkemIstrI/ n.  化学
( 12 )
Chinatown
/ ˈtʃaInətaʊn / n.  唐人街;
中国城
( 43 )
Chip Taylor
/ tʃIp ˈteIlə /  奇普·泰勒
( 28 )
chopstick
/ ˈtʃɒpstIk / n.  
筷子
(一般用复数)
( 43 )
cigarette
/ ˌsI􀱹􀱹əˈret/ n.  香烟;卷烟
( 4 )
coast / kəʊst/ n.  海岸;海滨
( 34 )
comedy
/ ˈkɒmIdI/ n.  喜剧
( 32 )
communication
/ kəˌmju∶nIˈkeIʃn / n.
交流;沟通
( 49 )
community
/ kəˈmju∶nItI/ n. 社区;社会( 10 )
compare
/ kəmˈpeə / v.  比较
( 19 )
completely
/ kəmˈpli∶tlI/ adv.  完全地
( 28 )
complex
/ ˈkɒmpleks/ adj.  
复杂的
( 29 )
conclude / kənˈklu∶d / v.  得出结论;断定( 25 )
conclusion / kənˈklu∶ʒn / n.  结论
( 8 )
condition
/ kənˈdIʃn / n.  环境;条件;
状态,状况
( 11 )
congratulation
/ kənˌ􀱹􀱹rætʃʊˈleIʃən / n.
祝贺;恭祝;贺词
( 58 )
contact / ˈkɒntækt/ n. & v.  接触;联系
( 50 )
contain / kənˈteIn / v.  包含
( 3 )
control / kənˈtrəʊl/ v.  控制;管理;支配( 5 )
corn / kɔ∶n / n.  玉米
( 3 )
correct
/ kəˈrekt/ adj.  
正确的;恰当的( 25 )
costume
/ ˈkɒstju∶m/ n.  服装;戏装
( 31 )
council
/ ˈkaʊnsl/ n.  委员会;议会
( 38 )
couple
/ ˈkʌpl/ n.  几个人(事物);
两个人(事物)
( 32 )
crash
/ kræʃ / v.  撞击;坠落
( 34 )
crawl
/ krɔ∶l/ v.  爬行;匍匐行进
( 23 )
crossword / ˈkrɒswɜ∶d / n.  纵横字谜
( 12 )
custom
/ ˈkʌstəm/ n.  习惯;习俗;风俗
( 46 )
D
damage / ˈdæmIdʒ / v.  损害;损坏
( 5 )
Danielle
/ dænˈjel/  丹妮尔(人名)
( 38 )
dare / deə / v.  敢;敢于;挑战
( 5 )
deaf / def/ adj.  失聪的;聋的
( 10 )
decision
/ dIˈsIʒn / n.  决定
( 11 )
decorate / ˈdekəreIt/ v.  装饰
( 13 )
decoration
/ ˌdekəˈreIʃn / n.  
装饰品
( 43 )
definitely
/ ˈdefInətlI/ adv.  肯定
( 60 )
dentist / ˈdentIst/ n.  牙医
( 2 )
C
D
­171
development
/ dIˈveləpmənt/ n.  发展
( 30 )
dialogue
/ ˈdaIəlɒ􀱹􀱹/ n.  对话;对白
( 7 )
diet / ˈdaIət/ n.  日常饮食;日常食物
( 3 )
difficulty
/ ˈdIfIkəltI/ n.  困难
( 52 )
dining
/ ˈdaInI􀱻􀱻/ n.  用餐
( 52 )
direct
/ dIˈrekt/ v.  
导演;指导;指示
( 31 )
directly
/ dIˈrektlI/ adv.  
直接地
( 41 )
director
/ dIˈrektə / n.  导演;院长;校长;
主任;负责人
( 31 )
disabled / dIsˈeIbld / adj.  肢体有残疾的( 5 )
discovery
/ dIsˈkʌvərI/ n.  发现;发觉
( 30 )
disease / dIˈzi∶z/ n.  病;疾病
( 4 )
dispute
/ dIˈspju∶t/ n. & v.  争论;辩论
( 38 )
distant
/ ˈdIstənt/ adj.  遥远的
( 39 )
dive / daIv / v.  (dived 或dove / dived)
跳水;俯冲
( 21 )
DNA  脱氧核糖核酸
( 29 )
doll
/ dɒl/ n.  洋娃娃;玩偶
( 48 )
double
/ ˈdʌbl/ n. & adj. & adv.
两倍(的);双倍(的)
( 27 )
doubt
/ daʊt/ v.  怀疑
( 55 )
dragon
/ ˈdræ􀱹􀱹ən / n.  
龙
( 43 )
E
earthquake
/ ˈɜ∶􀱺􀱺kweIk / n.  地震
( 17 )
educator / ˈedʒʊkeItə / n.  教育家;
教育工作者
( 10 )
effect
/ Iˈfekt/ n.  
影响;效果
( 32 )
effort
/ ˈefət/ n.  精力;努力
( 19 )
elder / ˈeldə / n.  老人;长辈
( 41 )
elderly
/ ˈeldəlI/ adj.  上了年纪的;较老的
( 45 )
examination / I􀱹􀱹ˌzæmIˈneIʃn / n.  检查;
考试
( 1 )
examine / I􀱹􀱹ˈzæmIn / v.  检查
( 26 )
expect
/ Ikˈspekt/ v.  期待;盼望
( 14 )
experiment / IkˈsperImənt/ n.  实验;试验
( 25 )
express
/ Ikˈspres/ v.  表达
( 20 )
extra
/ ˈekstrə / adj.  
额外的;另外的
( 45 )
F
fable
/ ˈfeIbl/ n.  寓言
( 21 )
faint
/ feInt/ v.  昏倒
( 60 )
fairy
/ ˈfeərI/ n.  仙子;小精灵
( 24 )
false / fɔ∶ls/ adj.  错误的;假的
( 8 )
familiar
/ fəˈmIljə / adj.  
熟悉的;
常见到的
( 54 )
fantastic / fænˈtæstIk / adj.  奇异的;
了不起的;极好的
( 28 )
fat / fæt/ adj.  胖的;厚的
n.  脂肪;肥肉
( 19 )
fault / fɔ∶lt/ n.  缺点;过错
( 14 )
female
/ ˈfi∶meIl/ n.  雌性的动物或植物;
女子
( 28 )
fever / ˈfi∶və / n.  发烧;发热
( 1 )
fibre / ˈfaIbə / n.  (食物中的)纤维素
( 3 )
fiction
/ ˈfIkʃn / n.  
小说;虚构;编造
( 32 )
figure
/ ˈfI􀱹􀱹ə / v.  
计算;认为
( 51 )
focus
/ ˈfəʊkəs/ v.  集中;聚集
n.  焦点
( 5 )
foolish
/ ˈfu∶lIʃ / adj.  愚蠢的;傻的
( 44 )
force / fɔ∶s/ n.  力量
v.  迫使;强迫
( 25 )
forever
/ fərˈevə / adv.  永远
( 40 )
fork
/ fɔ∶k / n.  叉子
( 43 )
format
/ ˈfɔ∶mæt/ n.  格式;版式
( 19 )
fortunately
/ ˈfɔ∶tʃənətlI/ adv.  
幸运地
( 2 )
France / fr􀱷􀱷∶ns;fræns/  法国
( 32 )
frightened / ˈfraItnd / adj.  惊吓的;受惊的;
害怕的
( 22 )
G
general
/ ˈdʒenərəl/ adj.  一般的;普遍的
( 29 )
generation
/ ˌdʒenəˈreIʃn / n.  
一代(人) ( 44 )
gentleman
/ ˈdʒentlmən / n.  (pl. gentlemen)
F
G
E
­172
绅士;君子
( 37 )
German / ˈdʒɜ∶mən / adj.  德国的
n.  德国人;德语
( 2 )
goldfish
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹əʊldfIʃ / n.  
金鱼
( 33 )
goodness
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹ʊdnəs/ n.  善良;美德
( 15 )
government
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹ʌvənmənt/ n.  政府
( 11 )
graduate / ˈ􀱹􀱹rædʒʊeIt/ v.  毕业
( 11 )
grain / 􀱹􀱹reIn / n.  谷物;粮食
( 3 )
grandchild
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹ræntʃaIld / n.  
孙子;孙女;
外孙;外孙女
( 28 )
granddaughter
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹rændɔ∶tə / n.  
孙女;
外孙女
( 29 )
grandson
/ ˈ􀱹􀱹rænsʌn / n.  
孙子;外孙
( 29 )
greatly / ˈ􀱹􀱹reItlI/ adv.  非常;很
( 10 )
grey
/ 􀱹􀱹reI/ adj. & n.  
灰色(的)
( 33 )
guard
/ 􀱹􀱹􀱷􀱷∶d / n.  
卫兵;看守
( 34 )
guest / 􀱹􀱹est/ n.  客人
( 45 )
gun
/ 􀱹􀱹ʌn / n.  枪
( 48 )
H
Hamlet
/ ˈhæmlIt/   哈姆雷特(莎士
比亚悲剧剧名及该剧的主人公)
( 35 )
handbag / ˈhændbæ􀱹􀱹/ n.  手提包
( 34 )
handsome
/ ˈhænsəm/ adj.  好看的;英俊的
( 35 )
hang
/ hæ􀱻􀱻/ v. (hung / hung)悬挂;垂下( 13 )
hardly
/ ˈh􀱷􀱷∶dlI/ adv.  几乎不;几乎没有
( 49 )
harm
/ h􀱷􀱷∶m/ v. & n.  伤害;损害
( 4 )
harmful
/ ˈh􀱷􀱷∶mfl/ adj.  
(尤指对健康
或环境)有害的;导致损害的
( 4 )
headquarters / ˌhedˈkwɔ∶təz/ n.  总部
( 40 )
headset
/ ˈhedset/ n.  (尤指带麦克风的)
耳机;头戴式受话器
( 2 )
heat / hi∶t/ n.  高温;热;炉灶
v.  加热
( 16 )
Helen Keller / ˈhelən ˈkelə /  海伦·凯勒( 10 )
helmet
/ ˈhelmIt/ n.  头盔;防护帽
( 15 )
hers / hɜ∶z/ pron.  她的
( 5 )
holder
/ ˈhəʊldə / n.  
支托物;持有者
( 26 )
hum
/ hʌm/ v.  发嗡嗡声
( 20 )
human / ˈhju∶mən / n. & adj.  人(的);
人类(的)
( 44 )
humorous / ˈhju∶mərəs/ adj.  幽默的;
诙谐的
( 24 )
hybrid / ˈhaIbrId / adj.  杂交的
n.  杂交植物(动物)
( 9 )
I
icy / ˈaIsI/ adj.  结满冰的
( 14 )
identify
/ aIˈdentIfaI/ v.  确认;鉴别
( 29 )
illness / ˈIlnIs/ n.  疾病
( 10 )
immigrant
/ ˈImI􀱹􀱹rənt/ n.  移民
( 46 )
include / Inˈklu∶d / v.  包括;包含
( 3 )
instruction / Inˈstrʌkʃn / n.  指示;说明
( 29 )
interaction
/ ˌIntərˈækʃn / n.  一起活动;合作
( 39 )
interpersonal
/ ˌIntəˈpɜ∶sənl/ adj.
人际的;人际关系的
( 50 )
introduction
/ ˌIntrəˈdʌkʃn / n.  采用;
引进;推行
( 9 )
involve
/ Inˈvɒlv / v.  (使)参加;包含
( 31 )
itself / Itˈself/ pron.  它本身(自己)
( 56 )
J
James
/ dʒeImz/  詹姆斯(人名)
( 14 )
jar / dʒ􀱷􀱷∶/ n.  广口瓶;罐子
( 25 )
K
kick / kIk / v.  踢
( 5 )
knee
/ ni∶/ n.  膝;膝盖;膝关节
( 15 )
knife
/ naIf/ n.  刀
( 16 )
knock
/ nɒk / v.  敲;敲打;碰撞
( 23 )
L
lantern
/ ˈlæntən / n.  灯笼
( 43 )
law
/ lɔ∶/ n.  法律;法规
( 4 )
H
I
J
K
L
­173
leader
/ ˈli∶də / n.  领导者;领袖
( 9 )
lie
/ laI/ v.  (lay/ lain)平躺;躺
v.  (lied/ lied)说谎
n.  谎言,谎话
( 13 )
lifetime / ˈlaIftaIm/ n.  一生;终生
( 8 )
lighter
/ ˈlaItə/ n.  打火机;点火器
( 26 )
limit
/ ˈlImIt/ v.  
限制;限定
( 19 )
line
/ laIn/ n.  (诗)行;路线
( 20 )
liquid / ˈlIkwId/ adj.  清澈的;晶莹的
n.  液体
( 20 )
listener
/ ˈlIsnə/ n.  听者
( 50 )
lock
/ lɒk/ v.  (用锁)锁上;被锁上
n.  锁
( 39 )
loud
/ laʊd/ adj.  
大声的;喧哗的
( 22 )
lower
/ ˈləʊə/ v.  使(某事物)减少
( 39 )
lung / lʌ􀱻􀱻/ n.  肺
( 4 )
M
mad / mæd/ adj.  疯的;发怒的
( 34 )
mall
/ mɔ∶l/ n.  商场
( 60 )
manage
/ ˈmænIdʒ/ v.  
管理;负责
( 55 )
manners
/ ˈmænəs/ n.  礼仪;习俗;礼貌
( 45 )
marry
/ ˈmærI/ v.  结婚;嫁;娶
( 33 )
match
/ mætʃ/ n.  火柴
v.  相称;相配
( 26 )
meaning
/ ˈmi∶nI􀱻􀱻/ n.  意义;意思
( 7 )
medical
/ ˈmedIkl/ adj.  
医学的;医疗的( 11 )
mention
/ ˈmenʃn/ v.  提到;写到
(某人或某事)
( 6 )
merchant
/ ˈmɜ∶tʃənt/ n.  商人
( 59 )
message
/ ˈmesIdʒ/ n.  信息;消息
( 37 )
method
/ ˈme􀱺􀱺əd/ n.  方法;办法
( 25 )
migrate
/ ˈmaI􀱹􀱹reIt/ v.  移居;迁徙
( 28 )
milkweed
/ ˈmIlkˈwi∶d/ n.  (植)马利筋
( 28 )
mineral / ˈmInərəl/ n.  矿物质;矿物
( 3 )
missing
/ ˈmIsI􀱻􀱻/ adj.  缺少的;丢失的
( 7 )
misunderstanding
/ ˌmIsʌndəˈstændI􀱻􀱻/ n.
误解
( 49 )
mobile phone
/ ˌməʊbaIlˈfəʊn/ n.
移动电话
( 30 )
modest
/ ˈmɒdIst/ adj.  
谦虚的;谦恭的
( 45 )
moment
/ ˈməʊmənt/ n.  片刻;瞬间
( 54 )
musician
/ mju∶ˈzIʃən/ n.  音乐家;乐师
( 22 )
mutual
/ ˈmju∶tʃʊəl/ adj.  相互的
( 39 )
mystery
/ ˈmIstərI/ n.  神秘事物;奥秘
( 27 )
N
necessary
/ ˈnesIsərI/ adj.  
必需的
( 13 )
neck
/ nek/ n.  颈;脖子
( 23 )
neighbour
/ ˈneIbə/ n.  邻居
( 7 )
net
/ net/ n.  网;网络
( 33 )
Nobel / ˈnəʊbel/  诺贝尔(人名)
( 8 )
noisy
/ ˈnɔIzI/ adj.  喧闹的;吵闹的
( 47 )
Norman Bethune / ˈnɔ∶mən beˈ􀱺􀱺ju∶n/
诺尔曼·白求恩
( 11 )
notebook
/ ˈnəʊtbʊk/ n.  笔记本
( 56 )
noun
/ naʊn/ n.  名词
( 20 )
nuclear / ˈnju∶klIə/ adj.  核能的
( 8 )
O
object / ˈɒbdʒIkt/ n.  物体;对象;目标
( 17 )
officer
/ ˈɒfIsə/ n.  政府官员
( 48 )
official
/ əˈfIʃəl/ adj.  
官方的;正式的
( 46 )
operate / ˈɒpəreIt/ v.  动手术,做手术
( 11 )
option
/ ˈɒpʃn/ n.  选择
( 39 )
organization
/ ˌɔ∶􀱹􀱹ənaIˈzeIʃn/ n. 组织;机构( 38 )
ouch
/ aʊtʃ/ onom.  (表示突然的疼痛)
哎呦
( 37 )
ours
/ ˈaʊəz/ pron.  我们的
( 33 )
owner / ˈəʊnə/ n.  主人
( 57 )
oxygen / ˈɒksIdʒən/ n.  氧气
( 26 )
P
pain / peIn/ n.  疼痛
( 1 )
pale
/ peIl/ adj.  苍白的;浅色的
( 1 )
pardon / ˈp􀱷􀱷∶dn/ v. & n.  原谅
( 1 )
passage
/ ˈpæsIdʒ/ n.  章节;段落
( 19 )
M
N
O
P
­174
protein / ˈprəʊti∶n / n.  蛋白质
( 3 )
provide
/ prəˈvaId / v.  提供;供给
( 38 )
public
/ ˈpʌblIk / adj.  
公共的;大众的( 4 )
puzzle / ˈpʌzl/ n.  谜;智力游戏
( 12 )
puzzling
/ ˈpʌzlI􀱻􀱻/ adj.  令人费解的
( 28 )
Q
queen / kwi∶n / n.  女王;王后
( 34 )
R
raincoat
/ ˈreInkəʊt/ n.  雨衣
( 25 )
rather / ˈr􀱷􀱷∶ðə / adv.  相当;宁可
( 42 )
react
/ rIˈækt/ v.  
反应
( 48 )
reaction
/ rIˈækʃn / n.  
反应
( 48 )
recover / rIˈkʌvə / v.  恢复
( 14 )
refuse / rIˈfju∶z/ v.  拒绝;回绝
( 2 )
regret
/ rIˈ􀱹􀱹ret/ v. & n.  惋惜;懊悔
( 1 )
related
/ rIˈleItId / adj.  
有关的;相关的( 29 )
relativity / ˌreləˈtIvItI/ n.  相对性
( 8 )
religion
/ rIˈlIdʒən / n.  宗教
( 38 )
remain
/ rIˈmeIn / v. 仍然是;保持不变
( 11 )
repair / rIˈpeə / v.  修理;修补
( 37 )
repeat
/ rIˈpi∶t/ v.  重复;复述;背诵
( 29 )
reporter / rIˈpɔ∶tə / n.  记者
( 14 )
require
/ rIˈkwaIə / v.  需要
( 49 )
passport
/ ˈp􀱷􀱷∶spɔ∶t/ n.  途径,手段;护照( 50 )
pattern
/ ˈpætn/ n.  模式;形式
( 29 )
peacemaker
/ ˈpi∶sˌmeIkə/ n.  调解人
( 42 )
peanut / ˈpi∶nʌt/ n.  花生
( 9 )
peek / pi∶k/ v.  偷看;窥视
( 23 )
penny
/ ˈpenI/ n.  便士
( 44 )
percent / pəˈsent/ n.
百分之……
( 46 )
perhaps
/ pəˈhæps/ adv.  也许;可能
( 22 )
period
/ ˈpIərIəd / n.  时期,一段时间;
节;学时
( 58 )
permanent
/ ˈpɜ∶mənənt/ adj.  
永久的
( 40 )
pioneer
/ ˌpaIəˈnIə / n.  先锋;先驱
( 8 )
pity
/ ˈpItI/ n.  同情,怜悯;遗憾
( 5 )
planetary
/ ˈplænətrI/ adj.  
行星的
( 10 )
playwright
/ ˈpleIraIt/ n.  剧作家
( 35 )
plot
/ plɒt/ n.  情节
( 24 )
poet
/ ˈpəʊIt/ n.  诗人
( 20 )
poison / ˈpɔIzn / n.  毒药;毒物
( 16 )
policy / ˈpɒləsI/ n.  原则;政策
( 21 )
popcorn
/ ˈpɒpkɔ∶n / n.  爆米花
( 32 )
pound
/ paʊnd / n.  镑;磅
( 44 )
pour / pɔ∶/ v.  倒出;倾倒
( 25 )
praise
/ preIz/ v. & n.  称赞;赞扬
( 45 )
prefer
/ prIˈfɜ∶/ v.  更喜欢
( 32 )
president
/ ˈprezIdənt/ n.  会长;总统;
国家主席;董事长
( 38 )
pressure / ˈpreʃə / n.  压力,压强;挤压
( 25 )
prevent / prIˈvent/ v.  阻止;预防
( 16 )
primary
/ ˈpraImərI/ adj.  小学的;基本的
( 56 )
Princeton / ˈprInstən /  普林斯顿(地名) ( 8 )
private
/ ˈpraIvət/ adj. 私人的;私有的
( 45 )
produce / prəˈdju∶s/ v.  生产;出产
( 9 )
production
/ prəˈdʌkʃn / n.  生产,制造
( 9 )
progress
/ ˈprəʊ􀱹􀱹res/ n.  进步;进展
( 10 )
promise
/ ˈprɒmIs/ n.  承诺;许诺
( 50 )
proper
/ ˈprɒpə / adj.  
正确的;恰当的( 50 )
Q
R
(11)
resistance  /rɪ'zɪstəns/  n.    抵抗;反抗
review
/ rIˈvju∶/ n.  复习;回顾;评论
v.  
回顾;反思;评论
( 56 )
rhyme
/ raIm/ n.  韵;韵脚
v.  押韵
( 19 )
risk
/ rIsk / n.  危险;风险
( 4 )
rock
/ rɒk / n.  碎石;岩石
( 15 )
roll / rəʊl/ v.  滚动;(使)翻滚
( 14 )
rotten
/ ˈrɒtn / adj.  
腐烂的;腐败的
( 2 )
row / rəʊ/ v.  划(船)
( 57 )
rule / ru∶l/ n.  规则;规章
( 18 )
Russian / ˈrʌʃn / adj.  俄罗斯的
n.  俄罗斯人;俄语
( 47 )
­175
S
safety / ˈseIftI/ n.  安全;平安
( 13 )
salt / sɔ∶lt/ n.  食盐
( 16 )
Santa Claus
/ ˈsæntə klɔ∶z/  圣诞老人
( 43 )
Sara / ˈs􀱷􀱷∶rə /  莎拉(人名)
( 1 )
satisfy
/ ˈsætIsfaI/ v.  
使满意;使满足
( 40 )
scary
/ ˈskeərI/ adj.  
恐怖的;吓人的
( 15 )
scene
/ si∶n / n.  场景;景色;风景
( 23 )
scientific / ˌsaIənˈtIfIk / adj.  科学的
( 25 )
scissors
/ ˈsIzəs/ n.  剪刀
( 16 )
screen / skri∶n / n.  屏幕;荧光屏
( 20 )
script
/ skrIpt/ n.  
剧本
( 31 )
secret
/ ˈsi∶krIt/ n. & adj.  秘密(的)
( 53 )
secretary
/ ˈsekrətrI/ n.  秘书;干事
( 37 )
security / sIˈkjʊərətI/ n.  安全;保证
( 40 )
selfish
/ ˈselfIʃ / adj.  
自私的
( 23 )
senior
/ ˈsi∶niə / adj.  级别高的
( 57 )
separate
/ ˈsepəreIt/ v. (使)分开,分离( 37 )
serious / ˈsIərIəs/ adj.  严重的;严肃的
( 13 )
servant
/ ˈsɜ∶vənt/ n.  
仆人;雇工
( 34 )
serve
/ sɜ∶v/ v.  为……服务
( 34 )
service
/ ˈsɜ∶vIs/ n.  
服务
( 37 )
shallow / ˈʃæləʊ/ adj.  浅的
( 26 )
sharp
/ ʃ􀱷􀱷∶p / adj.  
锋利的;锐利的
( 15 )
shoulder
/ ˈʃəʊldə / n.  肩;肩膀
( 14 )
silence
/ ˈsaIləns/ n.  沉默;无声状态
( 41 )
silent
/ ˈsaIlənt/ adj.  沉默的;寂静的
( 41 )
silver / ˈsIlvə / adj. & n.  银(的)
( 21 )
simply
/ ˈsImplI/ adv.  只是
( 52 )
single
/ ˈsI􀱻􀱻􀱹􀱹l/ adj.  单一的;单独的
( 20 )
situation / ˌsItʃʊˈeIʃn / n.  状况;形势
( 40 )
sleepy
/ ˈsli∶pI/ adj.  困倦的,瞌睡的
( 6 )
slip / slIp / v.  滑倒
( 16 )
smoke / sməʊk / v.  吸烟
n.  烟
( 4 )
snake
/ sneIk / n.  蛇
( 39 )
society
/ səˈsaIətI/ n.  社会
( 44 )
soda / ˈsəʊdə / n.  苏打
( 16 )
softly
/ ˈsɒftlI/ adv.  
轻轻地
( 23 )
solar
/ ˈsəʊlə / adj.  太阳的;关于太阳的( 27 )
solution
/ səˈlu∶ʃn / n.  解决办法;答案
( 49 )
solve / sɒlv / v.  解决;解答
( 8 )
somebody / ˈsʌmbədI/ pron.  有人;某人( 4 )
somehow
/ ˈsʌmhaʊ/ adv.  以某种方式
(或方法)
( 52 )
soy
/ sɔI/ n.  大豆(作物);大豆食物
( 3 )
speech
/ spi∶tʃ / n.  发言;演讲
( 58 )
spoon / spu∶n / n.  匙勺
( 43 )
spread
/ spred / v.  (spread / spread)
张开;扩展
( 23 )
state / steIt/ v.  陈述;说明
( 20 )
stick
/ stIk / v.  (stuck/ stuck)插入;穿入( 15 )
stomach
/ ˈstʌmək / n.  胃;腹部
( 1 )
stranger
/ ˈstreIndʒə / n.  
陌生人
( 15 )
stretch
/ stretʃ / v.  伸展
( 20 )
successful
/ səkˈsesfl/ adj.  获得成功的;
有成就的
( 7 )
sudden
/ ˈsʌdn / n. & adj.  突然(的)
( 15 )
suffer
/ ˈsʌfə / v.  受苦,受难
( 40 )
suggest
/ səˈdʒest/ v.  
建议,提议;暗示( 30 )
super / ˈsju∶pə / adj.  超级的
( 9 )
survey
/ səˈveI/ v.  调查
/ ˈsɜ∶veI/ n.  调查
( 7 )
survival
/ səˈvaIvəl/ n.  生存;存活;幸存( 17 )
Switzerland / ˈswItsələnd /  瑞士
( 8 )
system
/ ˈsIstəm/ n.  系统
( 17 )
T
tale
/ teIl/ n.  故事;童话
( 24 )
tap
/ tæp / v.  轻拍;轻敲
( 54 )
task
/ t􀱷􀱷∶sk / n.  任务;工作
( 31 )
teahouse
/ ˈti∶haʊs/ n.  
茶馆
( 35 )
telephone
/ ˈtelIfəʊn / n.  电话;电话机( 5 )
telescope
/ ˈtelIskəʊp / n.  望远镜
( 27 )
S
T
­176
temple
/ ˈtempl/ n.  庙宇
( 43 )
text
/ tekst/ n.  
正文;文字材料
( 20 )
themselves / ðəmˈselvz/ pron.  他(她、它)
们自己
( 16 )
theory / ˈ􀱺􀱺IərI/ n.  理论;学说
( 8 )
though
/ ðəʊ/ conj.  虽然;尽管;即使;
然而
( 45 )
tidy
/ ˈtaIdI/ v.  使整洁;使整齐;整理
adj.  整洁的;整齐的
( 47 )
tip
/ tIp / v.  
给小费
( 45 )
titanic
/ taIˈtænIk / adj.  巨大的;
(Titanic)泰坦尼克号
( 32 )
toothache
/ ˈtu∶􀱺􀱺eIk / n.  牙痛
( 2 )
Toronto
/ təˈrɒntəʊ/  多伦多(地名)
( 11 )
town / taʊn / n.  城镇
( 14 )
tradition
/ trəˈdIʃn / n.  传统
( 48 )
tragedy
/ ˈtrædʒIdI/ n.  悲剧
( 35 )
training
/ ˈtreInI􀱻􀱻/ n.  训练;培养
( 18 )
trouble
/ ˈtrʌbl/ n.  麻烦;困难
( 53 )
twin
/ twIn / n. 双胞胎之一
( 29 )
U
ugly
/ ˈʌ􀱹􀱹lI/ adj.  
丑陋的;难看的
( 14 )
unable / ʌnˈeIbl/ adj.  不能的
( 5 )
underground
/ ˈʌndə􀱹􀱹raʊnd / adj.
地下的
( 43 )
unit
/ ˈju∶nIt/ n.  单元;单位
( 49 )
universal
/ ˌju∶nIˈvɜ∶sl/ adj.  通用的;
全世界的;普遍的
( 52 )
universe / ˈju∶nIvɜ∶s/ n. 宇宙;万象
( 8 )
unless
/ ənˈles/ conj.  除非;如果不
( 27 )
upset
/ ˌʌpˈset/ v.  使(某人)苦恼或心烦
( 39 )
upside / ˈʌpsaId / n.  上部;上边
( 25 )
V
valuable
/ ˈvæljʊəbl/ adj.  宝贵的
( 58 )
variety / vəˈraIətI/ n.  品种;变化
( 9 )
victory / ˈvIktərI/ n.  胜利
( 37 )
virtue
/ ˈvɜ∶tʃu∶/ n.  
美德
( 45 )
vitamin / ˈvItəmIn / n.  维生素
( 3 )
volume
/ ˈvɒlju∶m/ n.  音量;响度
( 39 )
W
waiter
/ ˈweItə / n.  
(餐馆的)男服务员( 45 )
wallet / ˈwɒlIt/ n.  钱包
( 57 )
wealth
/ wel􀱺􀱺/ n.  钱财;财富
( 55 )
wealthy
/ ˈwel􀱺􀱺I/ adj.  
富有的;富裕的
( 44 )
weapon / ˈwepən / n.  武器
( 8 )
weekday
/ ˈwi∶kdeI/ n.  工作日(星期一
至星期五的任何一天)
( 56 )
wham
/ wæm/ onom.  (突然的重击声)
砰;嘭
( 15 )
whatever / wɒtˈevə / pron.  无论什么;
  不管什么;任何(每样)事物
( 33 )
wheelchair / ˈwi∶ltʃeə / n.  轮椅
( 5 )
whenever
/ wenˈevə / conj.  
在任何……
的时候;无论何时
( 4 )
whether / ˈweðə / conj.  是否;不管;无论( 44 )
whom / hu∶m/ pron.  (用作动词或介词
的宾语)谁
( 12 )
wicked
/ ˈwIkId / adj.  
邪恶的
( 23 )
wife
/ waIf/ n.  
妻子
( 33 )
William Shakespeare
/ ˈwIljəm ˈʃeIkspIə /
威廉·莎士比亚(英国诗人、作家)
( 35 )
wolf
/ wʊlf/ n.  狼
( 2 )
woodcutter
/ ˈwʊdkʌtə / n.  伐木工
( 21 )
worst
/ wɜ∶st/ adj. & adv.  
(bad 或badly
的最高级)最坏的(地);最糟的(地) ( 11 )
wound
/ wu∶nd / n.  伤;伤口
( 14 )
writer / ˈraItə / n.  作家
( 10 )
X
X-ray / ˈeks reI/ n.  X 光;X 射线
( 1 )
Y
yogurt / ˈjɒ􀱹􀱹ət/ n.  酸奶
( 3 )
U
V
W
X
Y
­178
Unit 3
Unit 4
T. B. 
 
 
 
 
(tuberculosis 的缩写)肺结核 
 
 
(11)
remain in use 
 
 
 
仍在使用 
 
 
 
 
(11)
be well known for... 
 
 
因……而闻名;众所周知 
 
 
(11)
the War of Resistance against Japanese Aggression 抗日战争 
 
 
 
(11)
make a decision  
 
 
做决定  
 
 
 
 
(11)
first aid  
 
 
 
急救 
 
 
 
 
 
(11)
day after day 
 
 
 
一天又一天 
 
 
 
 
(11)
set up 
 
 
 
 
建立 
 
 
 
 
 
(11)
crossword puzzle 
 
 
纵横字谜游戏  
 
 
 
(12)
based on... 
 
 
 
基于……;以……为基础 
 
 
(12)
jump up  
 
 
 
跳起来  
 
 
 
 
(13)
in time  
 
 
 
及时 
 
 
 
 
 
(14)
run after 
 
 
 
追逐;追赶 
 
 
 
 
(14)
jump out 
 
 
 
跳出来  
 
 
 
 
(14)
all of a sudden  
 
 
突然;猛地 
 
 
 
 
(15)
go down 
 
 
 
掉下去  
 
 
 
 
(15)
so... that ... 
 
 
 
如此……以至于…… 
 
 
 
(15)
lie down 
 
 
 
躺下 
 
 
 
 
 
(15)
take off  
 
 
 
摘下;脱掉 
 
 
 
 
(15)
stick out of 
 
 
 
从……伸出来  
 
 
 
(15)
Thank goodness! 
 
 
谢天谢地! 
 
 
 
 
(15)
put out  
 
 
 
扑灭 
 
 
 
 
 
(16)
baking soda 
 
 
 
小苏打  
 
 
 
 
(16)
stay calm 
 
 
 
保持镇静 
 
 
 
 
(17)
protect... from (doing)...  
 
使……免于……;防止……遭受…… 
 
(17)
pull over 
 
 
 
(把车)开到路边  
 
 
 
(17)
keep an eye out for 
 
 
密切注意;提防;警觉  
 
 
(17)
bring down 
 
 
 
使瘫痪;降低,减少 
 
 
 
(17)
compared with...  
 
 
和……相比较  
 
 
 
(19)
a set number of   
 
 
一定数量的 
 
 
 
 
(20)
make one’s living 
 
 
谋生 
 
 
 
 
 
(21)
dive into... 
 
 
 
跳入……中;潜入 
 
 
 
(21)
Honesty truly is the best policy. 
 
诚为上策。 
 
 
 
 
(21)
once upon a time 
 
 
从前 
 
 
 
 
 
(22)
run away 
 
 
 
逃跑 
 
 
 
 
 
(22)
no longer 
 
 
 
不再;不复 
 
 
 
 
(22)
­179
Unit 5
Unit 6
pass by  
 
 
 
走过;经过 
 
 
 
 
(22)
knock down 
 
 
 
拆除;击倒;撞到 
 
 
 
(23)
at once  
 
 
 
立刻 
 
 
 
 
 
(23)
break out in blossom 
 
 
盛开;怒放 
 
 
 
 
(23)
stretch out 
 
 
 
伸出;伸开 
 
 
 
 
(23)
ever since... 
 
 
 
自从;从……起;自……以后  
 
(23)
fairy tale 
 
 
 
童话故事 
 
 
 
 
(24)
turn... upside down 
 
 
把……翻转;倒过来 
 
 
 
(25)
pour out 
 
 
 
涌出 
 
 
 
 
 
(25)
scientific method 
 
 
科学方法 
 
 
 
 
(25)
take... off 
 
 
 
把……拿开 
 
 
 
 
(25)
use up  
 
 
 
用光;用完 
 
 
 
 
(26)
be made up of 
 
 
 
由……组成 
 
 
 
 
(26)
solar system 
 
 
 
太阳系  
 
 
 
 
(27)
at night  
 
 
 
在夜间,在晚上 
 
 
 
(27)
even if  
 
 
 
即使;纵然 
 
 
 
 
(27)
in general 
 
 
 
一般而言;通常 
 
 
 
(29)
except for 
 
 
 
除……之外 
 
 
 
 
(29)
be related to 
 
 
 
与……相关 
 
 
 
 
(29)
billions of 
 
 
 
数十亿计的;大量 
 
 
 
(29)
turn... over 
 
 
 
使……翻转 
 
 
 
 
(30)
push up  
 
 
 
向上推  
 
 
 
 
(30)
push down 
 
 
 
向下按  
 
 
 
 
(30)
in place  
 
 
 
原地;在适当的位置 
 
 
 
(30)
be involved in 
 
 
 
参加;涉及;卷入 
 
 
 
(31)
divide up 
 
 
 
分配;划分;分割 
 
 
 
(31)
have... effect on  
 
 
对……有影响  
 
 
 
(32)
a couple of 
 
 
 
一些,几个;一对,一双 
 
 
(32)
action movie 
 
 
 
动作影片 
 
 
 
 
(32)
science fiction 
 
 
 
科幻;科幻小说 
 
 
 
(32)
be on 
 
 
 
 
放映;上演 
 
 
 
 
(32)
go off   
 
 
 
(灯)熄灭;停止运转 
 
 
 
(34)
in order to 
 
 
 
为了,以便 
 
 
 
 
(35)
put on  
 
 
 
上演 
 
 
 
 
 
(36)
­180
Unit 8
break down  
 
 
 
发生故障 
 
 
 
 
(37)
the day before yesterday  
 
前天;前日 
 
 
 
 
(37)
be out of service  
 
 
不在服务区;有故障 
 
 
 
(37)
text message 
 
 
 
短信 
 
 
 
 
 
(37)
jump in  
 
 
 
加入;打断谈话 
 
 
 
(37)
Me neither. 
 
 
 
我也不。(彼此彼此。)  
 
 
(37)
student council  
 
 
学生会  
 
 
 
 
(38)
provide... for...  
 
 
为……提供…… 
 
 
 
(38)
in the end 
 
 
 
最后,最终 
 
 
 
 
(38)
reach an agreement 
 
 
达成一致 
 
 
 
 
(38)
rather than 
 
 
 
而不是;(宁可……) 也不愿…… 
 
(39)
fall asleep 
 
 
 
入睡;睡着 
 
 
 
 
(39)
after all  
 
 
 
毕竟;终究;还是 
 
 
 
(39)
suffer through 
 
 
 
熬过;挨过 
 
 
 
 
(40)
World War II 
 
 
 
第二次世界大战 
 
 
 
(40)
the United Nations (the UN) 
 
联合国  
 
 
 
 
(40)
the Secretary-General 
 
 
秘书长  
 
 
 
 
(40)
the UN Security Council  
 
联合国安理会  
 
 
 
(40)
permanent member 
 
 
常任理事成员  
 
 
 
(40)
agree on 
 
 
 
对……取得一致意见 
 
 
 
(41)
in silence 
 
 
 
沉默地;安静地 
 
 
 
(41)
keep silent 
 
 
 
保持安静 
 
 
 
 
(41)
mean to do… 
 
 
 
有意做……;打算做…… 
 
 
(41)
thanks to…	
	
	
	
多亏……;由于…… 
 
 
 
(42)
hold a meeting  
 
 
会面;开会 
 
 
 
 
(42)
fight over…	
	
	
	
为……而争吵/争斗 
 
 
 
(42)
lucky money 
 
 
 
压岁钱  
 
 
 
 
(43)
temple fair 
 
 
 
庙会 
 
 
 
 
 
(43)
walks of life 
 
 
 
行业;阶层;各行各业  
 
 
(44)
in common 
 
 
 
共同的;共有的 
 
 
 
(44)
be similar to 
 
 
 
和……相似 
 
 
 
 
(44)
other than 
 
 
 
不;不同于;除了 
 
 
 
(44)
human being 
 
 
 
人类 
 
 
 
 
 
(44)
take turns 
 
 
 
轮流;依次 
 
 
 
 
(45)
Central America  
 
 
中美洲  
 
 
 
 
(46)
tidy up  
 
 
 
整理,收拾;归置 
 
 
 
(47)
Unit 7
­181
Unit 10
hang up  
 
 
 
挂上 
 
 
 
 
 
(47)
police officer 
 
 
 
警察,警官 
 
 
 
 
(48)
get along with 
 
 
 
与……相处 
 
 
 
 
(49)
be satisfied with  
 
 
对……满意 
 
 
 
 
(49)
in the open 
 
 
 
公开;露天;在户外 
 
 
 
(49)
come to a solution 
 
 
得出解决方案;得出解答 
 
 
(49)
move on 
 
 
 
往前走,前进  
 
 
 
(49)
eye contact 
 
 
 
眼神交流;目光接触 
 
 
 
(50)
waste time doing 
 
 
浪费时间做某事 
 
 
 
(50)
keep one’s promise 
 
 
遵守诺言;守信 
 
 
 
(50)
on time  
 
 
 
准时;按时 
 
 
 
 
(50)
ahead of 
 
 
 
(时间、空间)在……前面 
 
 
(50)
figure out 
 
 
 
弄清楚;弄明白 
 
 
 
(51)
cool down 
 
 
 
平静下来;冷却 
 
 
 
(51)
dining hall 
 
 
 
餐厅,饭厅 
 
 
 
 
(52)
adapt to  
 
 
 
适应,使适应于 
 
 
 
(52)
be absent from  
 
 
缺席;不出现  
 
 
 
(53)
so far 
 
 
 
 
目前为止;迄今 
 
 
 
(53)
do one’s share/part 
 
 
尽某人的责任; 做分内工作 
 
 
(53)
run into  
 
 
 
偶然遇见;撞上,撞到  
 
 
(54)
hear from 
 
 
 
接到来电;收到信息 
 
 
 
(54)
as for 
 
 
 
 
至于;关于 
 
 
 
 
(55)
on top of... 
 
 
 
除……外;更重要的是  
 
 
(56)
senior high (school) 
 
 
高中 
 
 
 
 
 
(57)
junior high (school) 
 
 
初中 
 
 
 
 
 
(57)
go by 
 
 
 
 
流逝;过去 
 
 
 
 
(58)
fall down 
 
 
 
摔倒;跌倒;失败 
 
 
 
(58)
pick yourself up  
 
 
振作精神;站起来 
 
 
 
(58)
on behalf of 
 
 
 
代表 
 
 
 
 
 
(58)
hold out  
 
 
 
伸出 
 
 
 
 
 
(60)
the Canadian Space Agency 
 
加拿大国家航天局 
 
 
 
(60)
keep one’s eye on 
 
 
留神;关注;留意 
 
 
 
(60)
Unit 9
­182
 Irregular Verbs
be	
	
was/were	
been
babysit	 	
babysat		
babysat
beat	
	
beat	
	
beaten
become		
became		
become
begin	
	
began	 	
begun
blow	
	
blew	
	
blown
break	
	
broke	
	
broken
bring	
	
brought		
brought
build	
	
built	
	
built
burn	
	
burned/burnt	
burned/burnt
buy	
	
bought	 	
bought
catch	
	
caught	 	
caught
choose	 	
chose	
	
chosen
come	
	
came	
	
come
cost	
	
cost	
	
cost
cut	
	
cut	
	
cut
deal	
	
dealt	
	
dealt
dig	
	
dug	
	
dug
do	
	
did	
	
done
draw	
	
drew	
	
drawn
dream	 	
dreamed/dreamt	dreamed/dreamt
drink	
	
drank	
	
drunk
drive	
	
drove	
	
driven
eat	
	
ate	
	
eaten
fall	
	
fell	
	
fallen
feed	
	
fed	
	
fed
feel	
	
felt	
	
felt
fight	
	
fought	 	
fought
find	
	
found	
	
found
fit	
	
fitted/fit		
fitted/fit
fly	
	
flew	
	
flown
forget	
	
forgot	 	
forgotten
freeze	 	
froze	
	
frozen
get	
	
got	
	
got/gotten
give	
	
gave	
	
given
go	
	
went	
	
gone
grow	
	
grew	
	
grown
hang	
	
hung/hanged	
hung/hanged
have	
	
had	
	
had
hear	
	
heard	
	
heard
hide	
	
hid	
	
hidden
hit	
	
hit	
	
hit
hold	
	
held	
	
held
hurt	
	
hurt	
	
hurt
keep	
	
kept	
	
kept
know	
	
knew	
	
known
lay	
	
laid	
	
laid
lead	
	
led	
	
led
leave	
	
left	
	
left
lend	
	
lent	
	
lent
let	
	
let	
	
let
lie	
	
lay	
	
lain
light	
	
lighted/lit	
lighted/lit
lose	
	
lost	
	
lost
make	
	
made	
	
made
mean	
	
meant	 	
meant
meet	
	
met	
	
met
mistake		
mistook		
mistaken
pay	
	
paid	
	
paid
put	
	
put	
	
put
read	
	
read	
	
read
ride	
	
rode	
	
ridden
ring	
	
rang	
	
rung
rise	
	
rose	
	
risen
run	
	
ran	
	
run
say	
	
said	
	
said
see	
	
saw	
	
seen
sell	
	
sold	
	
sold
send	
	
sent	
	
sent
set	
	
set	
	
set
­183
shake	
	
shook	 	
shaken
shine	
	
shone	
	
shone
show	
	
showed		
shown
shut	
	
shut	
	
shut
sing	
	
sang	
	
sung
sink	
	
sank	
	
sunk
sit	
	
sat	
	
sat
sleep	
	
slept	
	
slept
smell	
	
smelled/smelt	
smelled/smelt
speak	
	
spoke	
	
spoken
spell	
	
spelled/spelt	
spelled/spelt
spend	
	
spent	
	
spent
spread	 	
spread	 	
spread
stand	
	
stood	
	
stood
steal	
	
stole	
	
stolen
stick	
	
stuck	
	
stuck
strive	
	
strove	 	
striven
swim	
	
swam	
	
swum
swing	 	
swung	 	
swung
take	
	
took	
	
taken
teach	
	
taught	 	
taught
tear	
	
tore	
	
torn
tell	
	
told	
	
told
think	
	
thought		
thought
throw	
	
threw	
	
thrown
understand	
understood	
understood
wake	
	
woke	
	
woken
wear	
	
wore	
	
worn
win	
	
won	
	
won
write	
	
wrote	
	
written
­184
Grammar
情态动词(Modal Verbs)
在八年级上册,我们已经对情态动词may, might, will, would的用法进行了归纳。can, could, 
need, should, must也是常见的情态动词,现就其用法归纳总结如下:
1. can/could 能,可能,可以 (can多用于指现在或将来,could多用于指过去)
1) 表示能力,相当于be able to。例如:
I can make noodles myself.
Sorry, I can’t follow you. Please say that again.
Can people prevent certain accidents?
The girl could speak English when she was a child.
The street was icy — the car couldn’t stop in time.
How could the man pull a train with his teeth!
2)表示可能。例如:
Smoking can cause diseases of the lungs.
Some of the disadvantages can become real problems if we don’t take care.
This could be a class project!
can/could用在否定句和疑问句中多表示猜测。例如:
The boy can’t be so careless.
There is someone outside. Who can it be?
It couldn’t be true.
Could it be Brian?
Where could Danny be at that time?
3) 表示允许。例如:
Can I speak to Jenny?
Can you send me a photo of yourself?
You can go.
could代替can, 语气显得更加委婉。例如:
Could you open the door for me, please? 
Could you speak more loudly?
Could I help you?
2.  should 应当,应该
1)表示劝告、建议。例如:
We should go to the hospital right now.
As a student, you should never smoke.
You shouldn’t be so careless.
­185
2) 表示征求同意或征询意见,用于主语为第一人称的疑问句。例如:
Should I open the window?
When should we have the meeting?
What should I do to be a polite guest?
3.  need 必要,需要(作情态动词时只用于否定句和疑问句)
1) 用在否定句中。例如:
Danny, you needn’t get up so early.
We needn’t worry about him.
2) 用在疑问句中,肯定回答一般用must, 否定回答一般用need not。例如:
— Need we eat foods from each food group? — Yes, you must.
— Need the guests leave the place right away? — No, they needn’t.
注意:
need在肯定句中通常用作实义动词,有人称和数的变化。例如:
He needs to take an X-ray.
4. must 必须,应该
1) 表示必须。例如:
In a poem, every word must have power and meaning.
We must do everything carefully.
2)  在否定句中表示不许。 例如:
Cars mustn’t be parked here.
You mustn’t lend the book to others.
3) 表示推测,用在肯定句中,意为“一定”,“准是”。例如:
You must be tired after the long walk.
He thought it must be the king’s musicians passing by.
注意:
回答带有must 的一般疑问句时,否定回答常用need not, 而不用must not。例如:
— Must the students be back by four o’clock?  
— Yes, they must. (No, they needn’t.)
状语从句(Adverbial Clause)
到目前为止,我们学习了because, when, before, after, as, if, although等连词引导的状语从句。
现在归纳总结如下:
  连  词
示  例
because(因为,由于)
People call them Kiwis because they make the sound: keee-weee.
The kitchen is dangerous because there are many glass objects.
原因状语从句
­186
 连  词
示  例
when (当……时候)
When she was nineteen months old, Helen fell ill.
before (在……以前)
Every night, he reads for half an hour before he goes to sleep.
after (在……以后)
After Einstein finished school, he went on to study physics in 
Switzerland.
as (一边……一边;
当……时候;随着)
I thought about it as I walked to school and later as I walked home.
Jane cheers as her son runs and kicks the ball.
As Helen grew older, she made a lot of progress and learned to read.
while (和……同时)
I listened to music while she worked.
时间状语从句
连  词
从句类型
示  例
if
(如果)
条件状语从句
If you are outside, get to an open area as fast as you can.
(al)though 
(虽然)
让步状语从句
Although I have lived in Canada for a long time, I still don’t feel 
Canadian.
so that 
(以便)
目的状语从句
I’ll speak slowly so that you can understand me.
so… that 
(如此……
以至于)
结果状语从句
The spirit was so happy with the woodcutter’s honesty that she 
gave him the other two axes as presents.
其他状语从句
定语从句(Attributive Clause)
定语从句在复合句中作定语,修饰主句中的名词或代词,被修饰的名词或者代词称为先行
词,定语从句通常位于先行词之后,由关系词引导。初中阶段我们要能辨认并理解由that, which, 
who等关系代词引导的定语从句。which指代物,who指代人,that既可指物也可指人。that或
which在从句中作宾语时可以省略。
 关系代词
示例(句中斜体词为先行词)
that
Bethune invented tools that/which remain in use today.
We should do things (that/which) we like. 
which
He is reading a book which/that was written by their teacher.
The film (which/that) we saw last night was wonderful.
who
Helen did her best to help others in the community who/that were deaf or blind. 
We never really hear about all these people who/that work behind the camera.
­187
过去进行时(Past Continuous Tense)
过去进行时态表示在过去某一时刻或某一段时间内进行或发生的动作。
1. 过去进行时的构成
过去进行时的构成: was/were + v-ing。过去进行时常与表示过去的时间状语连用(当上下文
有时间暗示时,也可省去时间状语)。例如:
We were having supper when the phone rang.
The giant saw that more children were crawling through a hole in the wall.
We were watching TV from seven to nine last night. 
What was he doing in the countryside all day last Sunday?  
2. 过去进行时的用法
1) 表示在过去某个时间点正在发生的事情。时间点可以用介词短语、副词或从句来表示,
也可由上下语境暗示。例如: 
What was she doing at nine o’clock yesterday?  (介词短语表示时间点) 
When I saw him, he was watering his flowers in his garden.  (when从句表示时间点) 
2) 在复合句中,如果主要动作和背景动作都是延续的或同时发生的,那么主、从句的动词
都可以用过去进行时。例如: 
While he was waiting for the bus, he was reading a newspaper.   (两个动作都是延续的) 
He was cleaning his car while I was cooking.  (两个动作同时进行) 
专有名词(Proper Nouns)
专有名词表示人、机构、场所等特有的名称。例如:
1. 人名:Helen, Einstein, Danny, Jenny, Li Ming
2. 地名:Switzerland, Princeton, Europe, Lanzhou
3. 星期、月份:Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, January, February, March
4. 节日:Christmas Day, Thanksgiving Day, May Day, the Spring Festival
5. 机构:the United Nations, Princeton University 
注意:
专有名词前一般不加冠词, 但下列情况须加定冠词the。
1. 在江、河、湖、海等专有名词前:the Yellow River, the Rockies
2. 普通名词构成的专有名词前:the Silk Road, the Lanzhou Zhongshan Bridge
3. 在复数姓氏、朝代的专有名词前:the Smiths,the Ming Dynasty
宾语补足语(Object Complements)
在八年级上册,我们已经学习了简单句的五种基本句型,并接触了宾语补足语。宾语补足
语用于补充说明宾语,通常由形容词、名词、副词、介词短语、v-ing、动词不定式等担任。动
词不定式作宾语补足语时是否带to,取决于所跟动词。动词是tell, want, ask, advise, order, know, 
­188
consider等时,接带to的不定式作宾语补足语;动词是make, let, have, see, watch, hear等时,接不
带to的动词不定式作宾语补足语。例如:
The good news made them happy.
We consider Ms. Liu a good teacher.
Jane likes to watch her son play soccer.
The doctor advised her to stay in bed for two days.
Ms. Liu asked us to make crossword puzzles of our heroes.
She made her hair stand up with the comb.
The Internet can be a useful tool, but don’t let it take up all of your time. 
连词(Conjunctions)
连词是一种虚词,用来连接单词、短语、从句或句子,不能独立作句子成分。我们已学过
的and, but, or, so, however等都为并列连词,用于表示并列、转折、选择等关系。例如:
My family and friends will come and watch me play.
The Spring Festival is usually in January or February.
I asked for nothing and let it go.
You can ride a camel in the Sahara Desert or walk in the ancient markets in Cairo.
It helps the situation, but sometimes it is not successful.
The giant made a decision and went out to his garden.
并列连词可以连接简单句构成并列句。并列句常见结构是:简单句 + 并列连词 + 简单句。
我们称这种简单句为分句,连词前一般用逗号(也可以不用)。例如:
I was quite nervous at first, but I felt relaxed later.
I am sending you the puzzle and you can try to guess who it is.
One of her teeth was rotten, so she had to go to the dentist.
It will be hard for them, but try explaining how important it is for their health.
如果简单句间的关系不很紧密,并列连词可单独引导一个句子。例如:
Ms. Cox was really happy with our projects. And we were really happy that we learned about 
theatre through making a theatre play.
Just imagine how difficult it is to satisfy all 193 members! However, the UN is still the best way 
for the world to solve its problems.
绿色印刷产品
绿色印刷产品
定价:11.30元
冀发改价调[2022]1365 号  冀发改价审[2024]102072  全国价格举报电话:12315